Commit e188eee7a4914ce8fb031616f75bcc58cbe58fd3

Authored by Simon Glass
Committed by Tom Rini
1 parent 54feea17d6

Drop config_cmd_all.h

This file does not include all commands and has not for a while. Let's
drop it.

Signed-off-by: Simon Glass <sjg@chromium.org>
Reviewed-by: Bin Meng <bmeng.cn@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Philipp Tomsich <philipp.tomsich@theobroma-systems.com>

Showing 2 changed files with 0 additions and 21 deletions Inline Diff

1 # 1 #
2 # (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013 2 # (C) Copyright 2000 - 2013
3 # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de. 3 # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de.
4 # 4 #
5 # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ 5 # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
6 # 6 #
7 7
8 Summary: 8 Summary:
9 ======== 9 ========
10 10
11 This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for 11 This directory contains the source code for U-Boot, a boot loader for
12 Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other 12 Embedded boards based on PowerPC, ARM, MIPS and several other
13 processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to 13 processors, which can be installed in a boot ROM and used to
14 initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application 14 initialize and test the hardware or to download and run application
15 code. 15 code.
16 16
17 The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of 17 The development of U-Boot is closely related to Linux: some parts of
18 the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some 18 the source code originate in the Linux source tree, we have some
19 header files in common, and special provision has been made to 19 header files in common, and special provision has been made to
20 support booting of Linux images. 20 support booting of Linux images.
21 21
22 Some attention has been paid to make this software easily 22 Some attention has been paid to make this software easily
23 configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are 23 configurable and extendable. For instance, all monitor commands are
24 implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to 24 implemented with the same call interface, so that it's very easy to
25 add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used 25 add new commands. Also, instead of permanently adding rarely used
26 code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can 26 code (for instance hardware test utilities) to the monitor, you can
27 load and run it dynamically. 27 load and run it dynamically.
28 28
29 29
30 Status: 30 Status:
31 ======= 31 =======
32 32
33 In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the 33 In general, all boards for which a configuration option exists in the
34 Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered 34 Makefile have been tested to some extent and can be considered
35 "working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems. 35 "working". In fact, many of them are used in production systems.
36 36
37 In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed 37 In case of problems see the CHANGELOG file to find out who contributed
38 the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files 38 the specific port. In addition, there are various MAINTAINERS files
39 scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or 39 scattered throughout the U-Boot source identifying the people or
40 companies responsible for various boards and subsystems. 40 companies responsible for various boards and subsystems.
41 41
42 Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the 42 Note: As of August, 2010, there is no longer a CHANGELOG file in the
43 actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically 43 actual U-Boot source tree; however, it can be created dynamically
44 from the Git log using: 44 from the Git log using:
45 45
46 make CHANGELOG 46 make CHANGELOG
47 47
48 48
49 Where to get help: 49 Where to get help:
50 ================== 50 ==================
51 51
52 In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for 52 In case you have questions about, problems with or contributions for
53 U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at 53 U-Boot, you should send a message to the U-Boot mailing list at
54 <u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic 54 <u-boot@lists.denx.de>. There is also an archive of previous traffic
55 on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's. 55 on the mailing list - please search the archive before asking FAQ's.
56 Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and 56 Please see http://lists.denx.de/pipermail/u-boot and
57 http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot 57 http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.comp.boot-loaders.u-boot
58 58
59 59
60 Where to get source code: 60 Where to get source code:
61 ========================= 61 =========================
62 62
63 The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at 63 The U-Boot source code is maintained in the Git repository at
64 git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at 64 git://www.denx.de/git/u-boot.git ; you can browse it online at
65 http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary 65 http://www.denx.de/cgi-bin/gitweb.cgi?p=u-boot.git;a=summary
66 66
67 The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of 67 The "snapshot" links on this page allow you to download tarballs of
68 any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also 68 any version you might be interested in. Official releases are also
69 available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ 69 available for FTP download from the ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/
70 directory. 70 directory.
71 71
72 Pre-built (and tested) images are available from 72 Pre-built (and tested) images are available from
73 ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/ 73 ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/images/
74 74
75 75
76 Where we come from: 76 Where we come from:
77 =================== 77 ===================
78 78
79 - start from 8xxrom sources 79 - start from 8xxrom sources
80 - create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot) 80 - create PPCBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/ppcboot)
81 - clean up code 81 - clean up code
82 - make it easier to add custom boards 82 - make it easier to add custom boards
83 - make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs 83 - make it possible to add other [PowerPC] CPUs
84 - extend functions, especially: 84 - extend functions, especially:
85 * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader 85 * Provide extended interface to Linux boot loader
86 * S-Record download 86 * S-Record download
87 * network boot 87 * network boot
88 * PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot 88 * PCMCIA / CompactFlash / ATA disk / SCSI ... boot
89 - create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot) 89 - create ARMBoot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/armboot)
90 - add other CPU families (starting with ARM) 90 - add other CPU families (starting with ARM)
91 - create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot) 91 - create U-Boot project (http://sourceforge.net/projects/u-boot)
92 - current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot 92 - current project page: see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot
93 93
94 94
95 Names and Spelling: 95 Names and Spelling:
96 =================== 96 ===================
97 97
98 The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling 98 The "official" name of this project is "Das U-Boot". The spelling
99 "U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments 99 "U-Boot" shall be used in all written text (documentation, comments
100 in source files etc.). Example: 100 in source files etc.). Example:
101 101
102 This is the README file for the U-Boot project. 102 This is the README file for the U-Boot project.
103 103
104 File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples: 104 File names etc. shall be based on the string "u-boot". Examples:
105 105
106 include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h 106 include/asm-ppc/u-boot.h
107 107
108 #include <asm/u-boot.h> 108 #include <asm/u-boot.h>
109 109
110 Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on 110 Variable names, preprocessor constants etc. shall be either based on
111 the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example: 111 the string "u_boot" or on "U_BOOT". Example:
112 112
113 U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo 113 U_BOOT_VERSION u_boot_logo
114 IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start 114 IH_OS_U_BOOT u_boot_hush_start
115 115
116 116
117 Versioning: 117 Versioning:
118 =========== 118 ===========
119 119
120 Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases 120 Starting with the release in October 2008, the names of the releases
121 were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning 121 were changed from numerical release numbers without deeper meaning
122 into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by 122 into a time stamp based numbering. Regular releases are identified by
123 names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date. 123 names consisting of the calendar year and month of the release date.
124 Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix 124 Additional fields (if present) indicate release candidates or bug fix
125 releases in "stable" maintenance trees. 125 releases in "stable" maintenance trees.
126 126
127 Examples: 127 Examples:
128 U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009 128 U-Boot v2009.11 - Release November 2009
129 U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree 129 U-Boot v2009.11.1 - Release 1 in version November 2009 stable tree
130 U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release 130 U-Boot v2010.09-rc1 - Release candidate 1 for September 2010 release
131 131
132 132
133 Directory Hierarchy: 133 Directory Hierarchy:
134 ==================== 134 ====================
135 135
136 /arch Architecture specific files 136 /arch Architecture specific files
137 /arc Files generic to ARC architecture 137 /arc Files generic to ARC architecture
138 /arm Files generic to ARM architecture 138 /arm Files generic to ARM architecture
139 /m68k Files generic to m68k architecture 139 /m68k Files generic to m68k architecture
140 /microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture 140 /microblaze Files generic to microblaze architecture
141 /mips Files generic to MIPS architecture 141 /mips Files generic to MIPS architecture
142 /nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture 142 /nds32 Files generic to NDS32 architecture
143 /nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture 143 /nios2 Files generic to Altera NIOS2 architecture
144 /openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture 144 /openrisc Files generic to OpenRISC architecture
145 /powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture 145 /powerpc Files generic to PowerPC architecture
146 /sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox" 146 /sandbox Files generic to HW-independent "sandbox"
147 /sh Files generic to SH architecture 147 /sh Files generic to SH architecture
148 /x86 Files generic to x86 architecture 148 /x86 Files generic to x86 architecture
149 /api Machine/arch independent API for external apps 149 /api Machine/arch independent API for external apps
150 /board Board dependent files 150 /board Board dependent files
151 /cmd U-Boot commands functions 151 /cmd U-Boot commands functions
152 /common Misc architecture independent functions 152 /common Misc architecture independent functions
153 /configs Board default configuration files 153 /configs Board default configuration files
154 /disk Code for disk drive partition handling 154 /disk Code for disk drive partition handling
155 /doc Documentation (don't expect too much) 155 /doc Documentation (don't expect too much)
156 /drivers Commonly used device drivers 156 /drivers Commonly used device drivers
157 /dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt. 157 /dts Contains Makefile for building internal U-Boot fdt.
158 /examples Example code for standalone applications, etc. 158 /examples Example code for standalone applications, etc.
159 /fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.) 159 /fs Filesystem code (cramfs, ext2, jffs2, etc.)
160 /include Header Files 160 /include Header Files
161 /lib Library routines generic to all architectures 161 /lib Library routines generic to all architectures
162 /Licenses Various license files 162 /Licenses Various license files
163 /net Networking code 163 /net Networking code
164 /post Power On Self Test 164 /post Power On Self Test
165 /scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles 165 /scripts Various build scripts and Makefiles
166 /test Various unit test files 166 /test Various unit test files
167 /tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc. 167 /tools Tools to build S-Record or U-Boot images, etc.
168 168
169 Software Configuration: 169 Software Configuration:
170 ======================= 170 =======================
171 171
172 Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the 172 Configuration is usually done using C preprocessor defines; the
173 rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible. 173 rationale behind that is to avoid dead code whenever possible.
174 174
175 There are two classes of configuration variables: 175 There are two classes of configuration variables:
176 176
177 * Configuration _OPTIONS_: 177 * Configuration _OPTIONS_:
178 These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with 178 These are selectable by the user and have names beginning with
179 "CONFIG_". 179 "CONFIG_".
180 180
181 * Configuration _SETTINGS_: 181 * Configuration _SETTINGS_:
182 These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if 182 These depend on the hardware etc. and should not be meddled with if
183 you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with 183 you don't know what you're doing; they have names beginning with
184 "CONFIG_SYS_". 184 "CONFIG_SYS_".
185 185
186 Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating 186 Previously, all configuration was done by hand, which involved creating
187 symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently, 187 symbolic links and editing configuration files manually. More recently,
188 U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel, 188 U-Boot has added the Kbuild infrastructure used by the Linux kernel,
189 allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your 189 allowing you to use the "make menuconfig" command to configure your
190 build. 190 build.
191 191
192 192
193 Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type: 193 Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type:
194 --------------------------------------------------- 194 ---------------------------------------------------
195 195
196 For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default 196 For all supported boards there are ready-to-use default
197 configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig". 197 configurations available; just type "make <board_name>_defconfig".
198 198
199 Example: For a TQM823L module type: 199 Example: For a TQM823L module type:
200 200
201 cd u-boot 201 cd u-boot
202 make TQM823L_defconfig 202 make TQM823L_defconfig
203 203
204 Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board 204 Note: If you're looking for the default configuration file for a board
205 you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file 205 you're sure used to be there but is now missing, check the file
206 doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards. 206 doc/README.scrapyard for a list of no longer supported boards.
207 207
208 Sandbox Environment: 208 Sandbox Environment:
209 -------------------- 209 --------------------
210 210
211 U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox' 211 U-Boot can be built natively to run on a Linux host using the 'sandbox'
212 board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture- 212 board. This allows feature development which is not board- or architecture-
213 specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to 213 specific to be undertaken on a native platform. The sandbox is also used to
214 run some of U-Boot's tests. 214 run some of U-Boot's tests.
215 215
216 See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details. 216 See board/sandbox/README.sandbox for more details.
217 217
218 218
219 Board Initialisation Flow: 219 Board Initialisation Flow:
220 -------------------------- 220 --------------------------
221 221
222 This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both 222 This is the intended start-up flow for boards. This should apply for both
223 SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules). 223 SPL and U-Boot proper (i.e. they both follow the same rules).
224 224
225 Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in 225 Note: "SPL" stands for "Secondary Program Loader," which is explained in
226 more detail later in this file. 226 more detail later in this file.
227 227
228 At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names 228 At present, SPL mostly uses a separate code path, but the function names
229 and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures 229 and roles of each function are the same. Some boards or architectures
230 may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use 230 may not conform to this. At least most ARM boards which use
231 CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this. 231 CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK conform to this.
232 232
233 Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly 233 Execution typically starts with an architecture-specific (and possibly
234 CPU-specific) start.S file, such as: 234 CPU-specific) start.S file, such as:
235 235
236 - arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S 236 - arch/arm/cpu/armv7/start.S
237 - arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S 237 - arch/powerpc/cpu/mpc83xx/start.S
238 - arch/mips/cpu/start.S 238 - arch/mips/cpu/start.S
239 239
240 and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and 240 and so on. From there, three functions are called; the purpose and
241 limitations of each of these functions are described below. 241 limitations of each of these functions are described below.
242 242
243 lowlevel_init(): 243 lowlevel_init():
244 - purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f() 244 - purpose: essential init to permit execution to reach board_init_f()
245 - no global_data or BSS 245 - no global_data or BSS
246 - there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed) 246 - there is no stack (ARMv7 may have one but it will soon be removed)
247 - must not set up SDRAM or use console 247 - must not set up SDRAM or use console
248 - must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to 248 - must only do the bare minimum to allow execution to continue to
249 board_init_f() 249 board_init_f()
250 - this is almost never needed 250 - this is almost never needed
251 - return normally from this function 251 - return normally from this function
252 252
253 board_init_f(): 253 board_init_f():
254 - purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r(): 254 - purpose: set up the machine ready for running board_init_r():
255 i.e. SDRAM and serial UART 255 i.e. SDRAM and serial UART
256 - global_data is available 256 - global_data is available
257 - stack is in SRAM 257 - stack is in SRAM
258 - BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables, 258 - BSS is not available, so you cannot use global/static variables,
259 only stack variables and global_data 259 only stack variables and global_data
260 260
261 Non-SPL-specific notes: 261 Non-SPL-specific notes:
262 - dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this 262 - dram_init() is called to set up DRAM. If already done in SPL this
263 can do nothing 263 can do nothing
264 264
265 SPL-specific notes: 265 SPL-specific notes:
266 - you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own 266 - you can override the entire board_init_f() function with your own
267 version as needed. 267 version as needed.
268 - preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis 268 - preloader_console_init() can be called here in extremis
269 - should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work 269 - should set up SDRAM, and anything needed to make the UART work
270 - these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S 270 - these is no need to clear BSS, it will be done by crt0.S
271 - must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r() 271 - must return normally from this function (don't call board_init_r()
272 directly) 272 directly)
273 273
274 Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at 274 Here the BSS is cleared. For SPL, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined, then at
275 this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below 275 this point the stack and global_data are relocated to below
276 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of 276 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR. For non-SPL, U-Boot is relocated to run at the top of
277 memory. 277 memory.
278 278
279 board_init_r(): 279 board_init_r():
280 - purpose: main execution, common code 280 - purpose: main execution, common code
281 - global_data is available 281 - global_data is available
282 - SDRAM is available 282 - SDRAM is available
283 - BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used 283 - BSS is available, all static/global variables can be used
284 - execution eventually continues to main_loop() 284 - execution eventually continues to main_loop()
285 285
286 Non-SPL-specific notes: 286 Non-SPL-specific notes:
287 - U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from 287 - U-Boot is relocated to the top of memory and is now running from
288 there. 288 there.
289 289
290 SPL-specific notes: 290 SPL-specific notes:
291 - stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and 291 - stack is optionally in SDRAM, if CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R is defined and
292 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM 292 CONFIG_SPL_STACK_R_ADDR points into SDRAM
293 - preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is 293 - preloader_console_init() can be called here - typically this is
294 done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a 294 done by selecting CONFIG_SPL_BOARD_INIT and then supplying a
295 spl_board_init() function containing this call 295 spl_board_init() function containing this call
296 - loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux 296 - loads U-Boot or (in falcon mode) Linux
297 297
298 298
299 299
300 Configuration Options: 300 Configuration Options:
301 ---------------------- 301 ----------------------
302 302
303 Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all 303 Configuration depends on the combination of board and CPU type; all
304 such information is kept in a configuration file 304 such information is kept in a configuration file
305 "include/configs/<board_name>.h". 305 "include/configs/<board_name>.h".
306 306
307 Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in 307 Example: For a TQM823L module, all configuration settings are in
308 "include/configs/TQM823L.h". 308 "include/configs/TQM823L.h".
309 309
310 310
311 Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux 311 Many of the options are named exactly as the corresponding Linux
312 kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to 312 kernel configuration options. The intention is to make it easier to
313 build a config tool - later. 313 build a config tool - later.
314 314
315 315
316 The following options need to be configured: 316 The following options need to be configured:
317 317
318 - CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX. 318 - CPU Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC85XX.
319 319
320 - Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS. 320 - Board Type: Define exactly one, e.g. CONFIG_MPC8540ADS.
321 321
322 - Marvell Family Member 322 - Marvell Family Member
323 CONFIG_SYS_MVFS - define it if you want to enable 323 CONFIG_SYS_MVFS - define it if you want to enable
324 multiple fs option at one time 324 multiple fs option at one time
325 for marvell soc family 325 for marvell soc family
326 326
327 - 85xx CPU Options: 327 - 85xx CPU Options:
328 CONFIG_SYS_PPC64 328 CONFIG_SYS_PPC64
329 329
330 Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements 330 Specifies that the core is a 64-bit PowerPC implementation (implements
331 the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR 331 the "64" category of the Power ISA). This is necessary for ePAPR
332 compliance, among other possible reasons. 332 compliance, among other possible reasons.
333 333
334 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV 334 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_TBCLK_DIV
335 335
336 Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the 336 Defines the core time base clock divider ratio compared to the
337 system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ 337 system clock. On most PQ3 devices this is 8, on newer QorIQ
338 devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc. 338 devices it can be 16 or 32. The ratio varies from SoC to Soc.
339 339
340 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT 340 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PCIE_COMPAT
341 341
342 Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device 342 Defines the string to utilize when trying to match PCIe device
343 tree nodes for the given platform. 343 tree nodes for the given platform.
344 344
345 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 345 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510
346 346
347 Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set, 347 Enables a workaround for erratum A004510. If set,
348 then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and 348 then CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV and
349 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set. 349 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY must be set.
350 350
351 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV 351 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV
352 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional) 352 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510_SVR_REV2 (optional)
353 353
354 Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR) 354 Defines one or two SoC revisions (low 8 bits of SVR)
355 for which the A004510 workaround should be applied. 355 for which the A004510 workaround should be applied.
356 356
357 The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision 357 The rest of SVR is either not relevant to the decision
358 of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus 358 of whether the erratum is present (e.g. p2040 versus
359 p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls 359 p2041) or is implied by the build target, which controls
360 whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set. 360 whether CONFIG_SYS_FSL_ERRATUM_A004510 is set.
361 361
362 See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about 362 See Freescale App Note 4493 for more information about
363 this erratum. 363 this erratum.
364 364
365 CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND 365 CONFIG_A003399_NOR_WORKAROUND
366 Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only 366 Enables a workaround for IFC erratum A003399. It is only
367 required during NOR boot. 367 required during NOR boot.
368 368
369 CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND 369 CONFIG_A008044_WORKAROUND
370 Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only 370 Enables a workaround for T1040/T1042 erratum A008044. It is only
371 required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision 371 required during NAND boot and valid for Rev 1.0 SoC revision
372 372
373 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY 373 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_CORENET_SNOOPVEC_COREONLY
374 374
375 This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600 375 This is the value to write into CCSR offset 0x18600
376 according to the A004510 workaround. 376 according to the A004510 workaround.
377 377
378 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR 378 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_DDR_ADDR
379 This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is 379 This value denotes start offset of DDR memory which is
380 connected exclusively to the DSP cores. 380 connected exclusively to the DSP cores.
381 381
382 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR 382 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M2_RAM_ADDR
383 This value denotes start offset of M2 memory 383 This value denotes start offset of M2 memory
384 which is directly connected to the DSP core. 384 which is directly connected to the DSP core.
385 385
386 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR 386 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_M3_RAM_ADDR
387 This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly 387 This value denotes start offset of M3 memory which is directly
388 connected to the DSP core. 388 connected to the DSP core.
389 389
390 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT 390 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DSP_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT
391 This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space. 391 This value denotes start offset of DSP CCSR space.
392 392
393 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK 393 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SINGLE_SOURCE_CLK
394 Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's. 394 Single Source Clock is clocking mode present in some of FSL SoC's.
395 In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply 395 In this mode, a single differential clock is used to supply
396 clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock. 396 clocks to the sysclock, ddrclock and usbclock.
397 397
398 CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F 398 CONFIG_SYS_CPC_REINIT_F
399 This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the 399 This CONFIG is defined when the CPC is configured as SRAM at the
400 time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized. 400 time of U-Boot entry and is required to be re-initialized.
401 401
402 CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP 402 CONFIG_DEEP_SLEEP
403 Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is 403 Indicates this SoC supports deep sleep feature. If deep sleep is
404 supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up. 404 supported, core will start to execute uboot when wakes up.
405 405
406 - Generic CPU options: 406 - Generic CPU options:
407 CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_GLOBAL_DATA 407 CONFIG_SYS_GENERIC_GLOBAL_DATA
408 Defines global data is initialized in generic board board_init_f(). 408 Defines global data is initialized in generic board board_init_f().
409 If this macro is defined, global data is created and cleared in 409 If this macro is defined, global data is created and cleared in
410 generic board board_init_f(). Without this macro, architecture/board 410 generic board board_init_f(). Without this macro, architecture/board
411 should initialize global data before calling board_init_f(). 411 should initialize global data before calling board_init_f().
412 412
413 CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN 413 CONFIG_SYS_BIG_ENDIAN, CONFIG_SYS_LITTLE_ENDIAN
414 414
415 Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those 415 Defines the endianess of the CPU. Implementation of those
416 values is arch specific. 416 values is arch specific.
417 417
418 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR 418 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR
419 Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is 419 Freescale DDR driver in use. This type of DDR controller is
420 found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core 420 found in mpc83xx, mpc85xx, mpc86xx as well as some ARM core
421 SoCs. 421 SoCs.
422 422
423 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR 423 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_ADDR
424 Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base. 424 Freescale DDR memory-mapped register base.
425 425
426 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU 426 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_EMU
427 Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as 427 Specify emulator support for DDR. Some DDR features such as
428 deskew training are not available. 428 deskew training are not available.
429 429
430 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1 430 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN1
431 Freescale DDR1 controller. 431 Freescale DDR1 controller.
432 432
433 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2 433 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN2
434 Freescale DDR2 controller. 434 Freescale DDR2 controller.
435 435
436 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3 436 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN3
437 Freescale DDR3 controller. 437 Freescale DDR3 controller.
438 438
439 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4 439 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_GEN4
440 Freescale DDR4 controller. 440 Freescale DDR4 controller.
441 441
442 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3 442 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDRC_ARM_GEN3
443 Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs. 443 Freescale DDR3 controller for ARM-based SoCs.
444 444
445 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1 445 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR1
446 Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with 446 Board config to use DDR1. It can be enabled for SoCs with
447 Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board 447 Freescale DDR1 or DDR2 controllers, depending on the board
448 implemetation. 448 implemetation.
449 449
450 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2 450 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR2
451 Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with 451 Board config to use DDR2. It can be enabled for SoCs with
452 Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board 452 Freescale DDR2 or DDR3 controllers, depending on the board
453 implementation. 453 implementation.
454 454
455 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3 455 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3
456 Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with 456 Board config to use DDR3. It can be enabled for SoCs with
457 Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers. 457 Freescale DDR3 or DDR3L controllers.
458 458
459 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L 459 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR3L
460 Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with 460 Board config to use DDR3L. It can be enabled for SoCs with
461 DDR3L controllers. 461 DDR3L controllers.
462 462
463 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4 463 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR4
464 Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with 464 Board config to use DDR4. It can be enabled for SoCs with
465 DDR4 controllers. 465 DDR4 controllers.
466 466
467 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE 467 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_BE
468 Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian 468 Defines the IFC controller register space as Big Endian
469 469
470 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE 470 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_LE
471 Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian 471 Defines the IFC controller register space as Little Endian
472 472
473 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV 473 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_IFC_CLK_DIV
474 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller). 474 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to IFC controller).
475 475
476 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV 476 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_LBC_CLK_DIV
477 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller). 477 Defines divider of platform clock(clock input to eLBC controller).
478 478
479 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI 479 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_PBI
480 It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image. 480 It enables addition of RCW (Power on reset configuration) in built image.
481 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details 481 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
482 482
483 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW 483 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_PBL_RCW
484 It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image. 484 It adds PBI(pre-boot instructions) commands in u-boot build image.
485 PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution. 485 PBI commands can be used to configure SoC before it starts the execution.
486 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details 486 Please refer doc/README.pblimage for more details
487 487
488 CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL 488 CONFIG_SPL_FSL_PBL
489 It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format 489 It adds a target to create boot binary having SPL binary in PBI format
490 concatenated with u-boot binary. 490 concatenated with u-boot binary.
491 491
492 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE 492 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_BE
493 Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian 493 Defines the DDR controller register space as Big Endian
494 494
495 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE 495 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_LE
496 Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian 496 Defines the DDR controller register space as Little Endian
497 497
498 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY 498 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_SDRAM_BASE_PHY
499 Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the 499 Physical address from the view of DDR controllers. It is the
500 same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But 500 same as CONFIG_SYS_DDR_SDRAM_BASE for all Power SoCs. But
501 it could be different for ARM SoCs. 501 it could be different for ARM SoCs.
502 502
503 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B 503 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_INTLV_256B
504 DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special 504 DDR controller interleaving on 256-byte. This is a special
505 interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape 505 interleaving mode, handled by Dickens for Freescale layerscape
506 SoCs with ARM core. 506 SoCs with ARM core.
507 507
508 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS 508 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_DDR_MAIN_NUM_CTRLS
509 Number of controllers used as main memory. 509 Number of controllers used as main memory.
510 510
511 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS 511 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_OTHER_DDR_NUM_CTRLS
512 Number of controllers used for other than main memory. 512 Number of controllers used for other than main memory.
513 513
514 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR 514 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_HAS_DP_DDR
515 Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA. 515 Defines the SoC has DP-DDR used for DPAA.
516 516
517 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE 517 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_BE
518 Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian 518 Defines the SEC controller register space as Big Endian
519 519
520 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE 520 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_SEC_LE
521 Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian 521 Defines the SEC controller register space as Little Endian
522 522
523 - MIPS CPU options: 523 - MIPS CPU options:
524 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET 524 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_SP_OFFSET
525 525
526 Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack 526 Offset relative to CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE for initial stack
527 pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before 527 pointer. This is needed for the temporary stack before
528 relocation. 528 relocation.
529 529
530 CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE 530 CONFIG_SYS_MIPS_CACHE_MODE
531 531
532 Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU. 532 Cache operation mode for the MIPS CPU.
533 See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h. 533 See also arch/mips/include/asm/mipsregs.h.
534 Possible values are: 534 Possible values are:
535 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA 535 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NO_WA
536 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA 536 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_WA
537 CONF_CM_UNCACHED 537 CONF_CM_UNCACHED
538 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT 538 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_NONCOHERENT
539 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE 539 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CE
540 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW 540 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_COW
541 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW 541 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_CUW
542 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED 542 CONF_CM_CACHABLE_ACCELERATED
543 543
544 CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG 544 CONFIG_SYS_XWAY_EBU_BOOTCFG
545 545
546 Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. 546 Special option for Lantiq XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash.
547 See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S. 547 See also arch/mips/cpu/mips32/start.S.
548 548
549 CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES 549 CONFIG_XWAY_SWAP_BYTES
550 550
551 Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq 551 Enable compilation of tools/xway-swap-bytes needed for Lantiq
552 XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to 552 XWAY SoCs for booting from NOR flash. The U-Boot image needs to
553 be swapped if a flash programmer is used. 553 be swapped if a flash programmer is used.
554 554
555 - ARM options: 555 - ARM options:
556 CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH 556 CONFIG_SYS_EXCEPTION_VECTORS_HIGH
557 557
558 Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not 558 Select high exception vectors of the ARM core, e.g., do not
559 clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15. 559 clear the V bit of the c1 register of CP15.
560 560
561 COUNTER_FREQUENCY 561 COUNTER_FREQUENCY
562 Generic timer clock source frequency. 562 Generic timer clock source frequency.
563 563
564 COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL 564 COUNTER_FREQUENCY_REAL
565 Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is 565 Generic timer clock source frequency if the real clock is
566 different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined 566 different from COUNTER_FREQUENCY, and can only be determined
567 at run time. 567 at run time.
568 568
569 - Tegra SoC options: 569 - Tegra SoC options:
570 CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE 570 CONFIG_TEGRA_SUPPORT_NON_SECURE
571 571
572 Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain 572 Support executing U-Boot in non-secure (NS) mode. Certain
573 impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode, 573 impossible actions will be skipped if the CPU is in NS mode,
574 such as ARM architectural timer initialization. 574 such as ARM architectural timer initialization.
575 575
576 - Linux Kernel Interface: 576 - Linux Kernel Interface:
577 CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ 577 CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ
578 578
579 U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz 579 U-Boot stores all clock information in Hz
580 internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux 580 internally. For binary compatibility with older Linux
581 kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the 581 kernels (which expect the clocks passed in the
582 bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable 582 bd_info data to be in MHz) the environment variable
583 "clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot 583 "clocks_in_mhz" can be defined so that U-Boot
584 converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the 584 converts clock data to MHZ before passing it to the
585 Linux kernel. 585 Linux kernel.
586 When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of 586 When CONFIG_CLOCKS_IN_MHZ is defined, a definition of
587 "clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the 587 "clocks_in_mhz=1" is automatically included in the
588 default environment. 588 default environment.
589 589
590 CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only] 590 CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES [relevant for MIPS only]
591 591
592 When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions 592 When transferring memsize parameter to Linux, some versions
593 expect it to be in bytes, others in MB. 593 expect it to be in bytes, others in MB.
594 Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes. 594 Define CONFIG_MEMSIZE_IN_BYTES to make it in bytes.
595 595
596 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT 596 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
597 597
598 New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be 598 New kernel versions are expecting firmware settings to be
599 passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware 599 passed using flattened device trees (based on open firmware
600 concepts). 600 concepts).
601 601
602 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT 602 CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
603 * New libfdt-based support 603 * New libfdt-based support
604 * Adds the "fdt" command 604 * Adds the "fdt" command
605 * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt 605 * The bootm command automatically updates the fdt
606 606
607 OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency. 607 OF_TBCLK - The timebase frequency.
608 OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device 608 OF_STDOUT_PATH - The path to the console device
609 609
610 boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC 610 boards with QUICC Engines require OF_QE to set UCC MAC
611 addresses 611 addresses
612 612
613 CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP 613 CONFIG_OF_BOARD_SETUP
614 614
615 Board code has addition modification that it wants to make 615 Board code has addition modification that it wants to make
616 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel 616 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel
617 617
618 CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP 618 CONFIG_OF_SYSTEM_SETUP
619 619
620 Other code has addition modification that it wants to make 620 Other code has addition modification that it wants to make
621 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel. 621 to the flat device tree before handing it off to the kernel.
622 This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting 622 This causes ft_system_setup() to be called before booting
623 the kernel. 623 the kernel.
624 624
625 CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP 625 CONFIG_OF_IDE_FIXUP
626 626
627 U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not. 627 U-Boot can detect if an IDE device is present or not.
628 If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot 628 If not, and this new config option is activated, U-Boot
629 removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux, 629 removes the ATA node from the DTS before booting Linux,
630 so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and 630 so the Linux IDE driver does not probe the device and
631 crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where 631 crash. This is needed for buggy hardware (uc101) where
632 no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7. 632 no pull down resistor is connected to the signal IDE5V_DD7.
633 633
634 CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory] 634 CONFIG_MACH_TYPE [relevant for ARM only][mandatory]
635 635
636 This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one 636 This setting is mandatory for all boards that have only one
637 machine type and must be used to specify the machine type 637 machine type and must be used to specify the machine type
638 number as it appears in the ARM machine registry 638 number as it appears in the ARM machine registry
639 (see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/). 639 (see http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/).
640 Only boards that have multiple machine types supported 640 Only boards that have multiple machine types supported
641 in a single configuration file and the machine type is 641 in a single configuration file and the machine type is
642 runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting. 642 runtime discoverable, do not have to use this setting.
643 643
644 - vxWorks boot parameters: 644 - vxWorks boot parameters:
645 645
646 bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following 646 bootvx constructs a valid bootline using the following
647 environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask, 647 environments variables: bootdev, bootfile, ipaddr, netmask,
648 serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs. 648 serverip, gatewayip, hostname, othbootargs.
649 It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile. 649 It loads the vxWorks image pointed bootfile.
650 650
651 Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride 651 Note: If a "bootargs" environment is defined, it will overwride
652 the defaults discussed just above. 652 the defaults discussed just above.
653 653
654 - Cache Configuration: 654 - Cache Configuration:
655 CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot 655 CONFIG_SYS_ICACHE_OFF - Do not enable instruction cache in U-Boot
656 CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot 656 CONFIG_SYS_DCACHE_OFF - Do not enable data cache in U-Boot
657 CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot 657 CONFIG_SYS_L2CACHE_OFF- Do not enable L2 cache in U-Boot
658 658
659 - Cache Configuration for ARM: 659 - Cache Configuration for ARM:
660 CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache 660 CONFIG_SYS_L2_PL310 - Enable support for ARM PL310 L2 cache
661 controller 661 controller
662 CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310 662 CONFIG_SYS_PL310_BASE - Physical base address of PL310
663 controller register space 663 controller register space
664 664
665 - Serial Ports: 665 - Serial Ports:
666 CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL 666 CONFIG_PL010_SERIAL
667 667
668 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs. 668 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL010 UARTs.
669 669
670 CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL 670 CONFIG_PL011_SERIAL
671 671
672 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs. 672 Define this if you want support for Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs.
673 673
674 CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK 674 CONFIG_PL011_CLOCK
675 675
676 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to 676 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL011 UARTs, set this variable to
677 the clock speed of the UARTs. 677 the clock speed of the UARTs.
678 678
679 CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS 679 CONFIG_PL01x_PORTS
680 680
681 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board, 681 If you have Amba PrimeCell PL010 or PL011 UARTs on your board,
682 define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported) 682 define this to a list of base addresses for each (supported)
683 port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h 683 port. See e.g. include/configs/versatile.h
684 684
685 CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL 685 CONFIG_SERIAL_HW_FLOW_CONTROL
686 686
687 Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver. 687 Define this variable to enable hw flow control in serial driver.
688 Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver 688 Current user of this option is drivers/serial/nsl16550.c driver
689 689
690 - Console Baudrate: 690 - Console Baudrate:
691 CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps 691 CONFIG_BAUDRATE - in bps
692 Select one of the baudrates listed in 692 Select one of the baudrates listed in
693 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. 693 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
694 694
695 - Autoboot Command: 695 - Autoboot Command:
696 CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND 696 CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
697 Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled; 697 Only needed when CONFIG_BOOTDELAY is enabled;
698 define a command string that is automatically executed 698 define a command string that is automatically executed
699 when no character is read on the console interface 699 when no character is read on the console interface
700 within "Boot Delay" after reset. 700 within "Boot Delay" after reset.
701 701
702 CONFIG_BOOTARGS 702 CONFIG_BOOTARGS
703 This can be used to pass arguments to the bootm 703 This can be used to pass arguments to the bootm
704 command. The value of CONFIG_BOOTARGS goes into the 704 command. The value of CONFIG_BOOTARGS goes into the
705 environment value "bootargs". 705 environment value "bootargs".
706 706
707 CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT 707 CONFIG_RAMBOOT and CONFIG_NFSBOOT
708 The value of these goes into the environment as 708 The value of these goes into the environment as
709 "ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used 709 "ramboot" and "nfsboot" respectively, and can be used
710 as a convenience, when switching between booting from 710 as a convenience, when switching between booting from
711 RAM and NFS. 711 RAM and NFS.
712 712
713 - Bootcount: 713 - Bootcount:
714 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT 714 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT
715 Implements a mechanism for detecting a repeating reboot 715 Implements a mechanism for detecting a repeating reboot
716 cycle, see: 716 cycle, see:
717 http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit 717 http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit
718 718
719 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV 719 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ENV
720 If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware 720 If no softreset save registers are found on the hardware
721 "bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a 721 "bootcount" is stored in the environment. To prevent a
722 saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable 722 saveenv on all reboots, the environment variable
723 "upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is 723 "upgrade_available" is used. If "upgrade_available" is
724 0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is 724 0, "bootcount" is always 0, if "upgrade_available" is
725 1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment. 725 1 "bootcount" is incremented in the environment.
726 So the Userspace Applikation must set the "upgrade_available" 726 So the Userspace Applikation must set the "upgrade_available"
727 and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully. 727 and "bootcount" variable to 0, if a boot was successfully.
728 728
729 - Pre-Boot Commands: 729 - Pre-Boot Commands:
730 CONFIG_PREBOOT 730 CONFIG_PREBOOT
731 731
732 When this option is #defined, the existence of the 732 When this option is #defined, the existence of the
733 environment variable "preboot" will be checked 733 environment variable "preboot" will be checked
734 immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY 734 immediately before starting the CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
735 countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp. 735 countdown and/or running the auto-boot command resp.
736 entering interactive mode. 736 entering interactive mode.
737 737
738 This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is 738 This feature is especially useful when "preboot" is
739 automatically generated or modified. For an example 739 automatically generated or modified. For an example
740 see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is 740 see the LWMON board specific code: here "preboot" is
741 modified when the user holds down a certain 741 modified when the user holds down a certain
742 combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when 742 combination of keys on the (special) keyboard when
743 booting the systems 743 booting the systems
744 744
745 - Serial Download Echo Mode: 745 - Serial Download Echo Mode:
746 CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO 746 CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
747 If defined to 1, all characters received during a 747 If defined to 1, all characters received during a
748 serial download (using the "loads" command) are 748 serial download (using the "loads" command) are
749 echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal 749 echoed back. This might be needed by some terminal
750 emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take 750 emulations (like "cu"), but may as well just take
751 time on others. This setting #define's the initial 751 time on others. This setting #define's the initial
752 value of the "loads_echo" environment variable. 752 value of the "loads_echo" environment variable.
753 753
754 - Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined) 754 - Kgdb Serial Baudrate: (if CONFIG_CMD_KGDB is defined)
755 CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE 755 CONFIG_KGDB_BAUDRATE
756 Select one of the baudrates listed in 756 Select one of the baudrates listed in
757 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below. 757 CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE, see below.
758 758
759 - Monitor Functions: 759 - Monitor Functions:
760 Monitor commands can be included or excluded
761 from the build by using the #include files
762 <config_cmd_all.h> and #undef'ing unwanted
763 commands, or adding #define's for wanted commands.
764
765 The default command configuration includes all commands 760 The default command configuration includes all commands
766 except those marked below with a "*". 761 except those marked below with a "*".
767 762
768 CONFIG_CMD_AES AES 128 CBC encrypt/decrypt 763 CONFIG_CMD_AES AES 128 CBC encrypt/decrypt
769 CONFIG_CMD_ASKENV * ask for env variable 764 CONFIG_CMD_ASKENV * ask for env variable
770 CONFIG_CMD_BDI bdinfo 765 CONFIG_CMD_BDI bdinfo
771 CONFIG_CMD_BOOTD bootd 766 CONFIG_CMD_BOOTD bootd
772 CONFIG_CMD_BOOTI * ARM64 Linux kernel Image support 767 CONFIG_CMD_BOOTI * ARM64 Linux kernel Image support
773 CONFIG_CMD_CACHE * icache, dcache 768 CONFIG_CMD_CACHE * icache, dcache
774 CONFIG_CMD_CONSOLE coninfo 769 CONFIG_CMD_CONSOLE coninfo
775 CONFIG_CMD_DHCP * DHCP support 770 CONFIG_CMD_DHCP * DHCP support
776 CONFIG_CMD_DIAG * Diagnostics 771 CONFIG_CMD_DIAG * Diagnostics
777 CONFIG_CMD_ECHO echo arguments 772 CONFIG_CMD_ECHO echo arguments
778 CONFIG_CMD_EDITENV edit env variable 773 CONFIG_CMD_EDITENV edit env variable
779 CONFIG_CMD_ELF * bootelf, bootvx 774 CONFIG_CMD_ELF * bootelf, bootvx
780 CONFIG_CMD_ENV_EXISTS * check existence of env variable 775 CONFIG_CMD_ENV_EXISTS * check existence of env variable
781 CONFIG_CMD_EXPORTENV * export the environment 776 CONFIG_CMD_EXPORTENV * export the environment
782 CONFIG_CMD_EXT2 * ext2 command support 777 CONFIG_CMD_EXT2 * ext2 command support
783 CONFIG_CMD_EXT4 * ext4 command support 778 CONFIG_CMD_EXT4 * ext4 command support
784 CONFIG_CMD_FS_GENERIC * filesystem commands (e.g. load, ls) 779 CONFIG_CMD_FS_GENERIC * filesystem commands (e.g. load, ls)
785 that work for multiple fs types 780 that work for multiple fs types
786 CONFIG_CMD_FS_UUID * Look up a filesystem UUID 781 CONFIG_CMD_FS_UUID * Look up a filesystem UUID
787 CONFIG_CMD_SAVEENV saveenv 782 CONFIG_CMD_SAVEENV saveenv
788 CONFIG_CMD_FLASH flinfo, erase, protect 783 CONFIG_CMD_FLASH flinfo, erase, protect
789 CONFIG_CMD_FPGA FPGA device initialization support 784 CONFIG_CMD_FPGA FPGA device initialization support
790 CONFIG_CMD_GO * the 'go' command (exec code) 785 CONFIG_CMD_GO * the 'go' command (exec code)
791 CONFIG_CMD_GREPENV * search environment 786 CONFIG_CMD_GREPENV * search environment
792 CONFIG_CMD_I2C * I2C serial bus support 787 CONFIG_CMD_I2C * I2C serial bus support
793 CONFIG_CMD_IMI iminfo 788 CONFIG_CMD_IMI iminfo
794 CONFIG_CMD_IMLS List all images found in NOR flash 789 CONFIG_CMD_IMLS List all images found in NOR flash
795 CONFIG_CMD_IMLS_NAND * List all images found in NAND flash 790 CONFIG_CMD_IMLS_NAND * List all images found in NAND flash
796 CONFIG_CMD_IMPORTENV * import an environment 791 CONFIG_CMD_IMPORTENV * import an environment
797 CONFIG_CMD_INI * import data from an ini file into the env 792 CONFIG_CMD_INI * import data from an ini file into the env
798 CONFIG_CMD_ITEST Integer/string test of 2 values 793 CONFIG_CMD_ITEST Integer/string test of 2 values
799 CONFIG_CMD_LDRINFO * ldrinfo (display Blackfin loader) 794 CONFIG_CMD_LDRINFO * ldrinfo (display Blackfin loader)
800 CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL * link-local IP address auto-configuration 795 CONFIG_CMD_LINK_LOCAL * link-local IP address auto-configuration
801 (169.254.*.*) 796 (169.254.*.*)
802 CONFIG_CMD_LOADB loadb 797 CONFIG_CMD_LOADB loadb
803 CONFIG_CMD_LOADS loads 798 CONFIG_CMD_LOADS loads
804 CONFIG_CMD_MD5SUM * print md5 message digest 799 CONFIG_CMD_MD5SUM * print md5 message digest
805 (requires CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY and CONFIG_MD5) 800 (requires CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY and CONFIG_MD5)
806 CONFIG_CMD_MEMINFO * Display detailed memory information 801 CONFIG_CMD_MEMINFO * Display detailed memory information
807 CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY md, mm, nm, mw, cp, cmp, crc, base, 802 CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY md, mm, nm, mw, cp, cmp, crc, base,
808 loop, loopw 803 loop, loopw
809 CONFIG_CMD_MEMTEST * mtest 804 CONFIG_CMD_MEMTEST * mtest
810 CONFIG_CMD_MISC Misc functions like sleep etc 805 CONFIG_CMD_MISC Misc functions like sleep etc
811 CONFIG_CMD_MMC * MMC memory mapped support 806 CONFIG_CMD_MMC * MMC memory mapped support
812 CONFIG_CMD_MII * MII utility commands 807 CONFIG_CMD_MII * MII utility commands
813 CONFIG_CMD_NET bootp, tftpboot, rarpboot 808 CONFIG_CMD_NET bootp, tftpboot, rarpboot
814 CONFIG_CMD_NFS NFS support 809 CONFIG_CMD_NFS NFS support
815 CONFIG_CMD_PING * send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network 810 CONFIG_CMD_PING * send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network
816 host 811 host
817 CONFIG_CMD_RUN run command in env variable 812 CONFIG_CMD_RUN run command in env variable
818 CONFIG_CMD_SF * Read/write/erase SPI NOR flash 813 CONFIG_CMD_SF * Read/write/erase SPI NOR flash
819 CONFIG_CMD_SOFTSWITCH * Soft switch setting command for BF60x 814 CONFIG_CMD_SOFTSWITCH * Soft switch setting command for BF60x
820 CONFIG_CMD_SOURCE "source" command Support 815 CONFIG_CMD_SOURCE "source" command Support
821 CONFIG_CMD_SPI * SPI serial bus support 816 CONFIG_CMD_SPI * SPI serial bus support
822 CONFIG_CMD_TFTPSRV * TFTP transfer in server mode 817 CONFIG_CMD_TFTPSRV * TFTP transfer in server mode
823 CONFIG_CMD_TFTPPUT * TFTP put command (upload) 818 CONFIG_CMD_TFTPPUT * TFTP put command (upload)
824 CONFIG_CMD_TIME * run command and report execution time (ARM specific) 819 CONFIG_CMD_TIME * run command and report execution time (ARM specific)
825 CONFIG_CMD_TIMER * access to the system tick timer 820 CONFIG_CMD_TIMER * access to the system tick timer
826 CONFIG_CMD_USB * USB support 821 CONFIG_CMD_USB * USB support
827 CONFIG_CMD_CDP * Cisco Discover Protocol support 822 CONFIG_CMD_CDP * Cisco Discover Protocol support
828 CONFIG_CMD_XIMG Load part of Multi Image 823 CONFIG_CMD_XIMG Load part of Multi Image
829 824
830 EXAMPLE: If you want all functions except of network 825 EXAMPLE: If you want all functions except of network
831 support you can write: 826 support you can write:
832 827
833 #include "config_cmd_all.h" 828 #include "config_cmd_all.h"
834 #undef CONFIG_CMD_NET 829 #undef CONFIG_CMD_NET
835 830
836 Other Commands: 831 Other Commands:
837 fdt (flattened device tree) command: CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT 832 fdt (flattened device tree) command: CONFIG_OF_LIBFDT
838 833
839 Note: Don't enable the "icache" and "dcache" commands 834 Note: Don't enable the "icache" and "dcache" commands
840 (configuration option CONFIG_CMD_CACHE) unless you know 835 (configuration option CONFIG_CMD_CACHE) unless you know
841 what you (and your U-Boot users) are doing. Data 836 what you (and your U-Boot users) are doing. Data
842 cache cannot be enabled on systems like the 837 cache cannot be enabled on systems like the
843 8xx (where accesses to the IMMR region must be 838 8xx (where accesses to the IMMR region must be
844 uncached), and it cannot be disabled on all other 839 uncached), and it cannot be disabled on all other
845 systems where we (mis-) use the data cache to hold an 840 systems where we (mis-) use the data cache to hold an
846 initial stack and some data. 841 initial stack and some data.
847 842
848 843
849 XXX - this list needs to get updated! 844 XXX - this list needs to get updated!
850 845
851 - Removal of commands 846 - Removal of commands
852 If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable 847 If no commands are needed to boot, you can disable
853 CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line 848 CONFIG_CMDLINE to remove them. In this case, the command line
854 will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the 849 will not be available, and when U-Boot wants to execute the
855 boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command() 850 boot command (on start-up) it will call board_run_command()
856 instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very 851 instead. This can reduce image size significantly for very
857 simple boot procedures. 852 simple boot procedures.
858 853
859 - Regular expression support: 854 - Regular expression support:
860 CONFIG_REGEX 855 CONFIG_REGEX
861 If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against 856 If this variable is defined, U-Boot is linked against
862 the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library, 857 the SLRE (Super Light Regular Expression) library,
863 which adds regex support to some commands, as for 858 which adds regex support to some commands, as for
864 example "env grep" and "setexpr". 859 example "env grep" and "setexpr".
865 860
866 - Device tree: 861 - Device tree:
867 CONFIG_OF_CONTROL 862 CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
868 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree 863 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use a device tree
869 to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically 864 to configure its devices, instead of relying on statically
870 compiled #defines in the board file. This option is 865 compiled #defines in the board file. This option is
871 experimental and only available on a few boards. The device 866 experimental and only available on a few boards. The device
872 tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob. 867 tree is available in the global data as gd->fdt_blob.
873 868
874 U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can 869 U-Boot needs to get its device tree from somewhere. This can
875 be done using one of the three options below: 870 be done using one of the three options below:
876 871
877 CONFIG_OF_EMBED 872 CONFIG_OF_EMBED
878 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree 873 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will embed a device tree
879 binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the 874 binary in its image. This device tree file should be in the
880 board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file 875 board directory and called <soc>-<board>.dts. The binary file
881 is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through 876 is then picked up in board_init_f() and made available through
882 the global data structure as gd->blob. 877 the global data structure as gd->blob.
883 878
884 CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE 879 CONFIG_OF_SEPARATE
885 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree 880 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will build a device tree
886 binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific 881 binary. It will be called u-boot.dtb. Architecture-specific
887 code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by: 882 code will locate it at run-time. Generally this works by:
888 883
889 cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin 884 cat u-boot.bin u-boot.dtb >image.bin
890 885
891 and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called 886 and in fact, U-Boot does this for you, creating a file called
892 u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can 887 u-boot-dtb.bin which is useful in the common case. You can
893 still use the individual files if you need something more 888 still use the individual files if you need something more
894 exotic. 889 exotic.
895 890
896 CONFIG_OF_BOARD 891 CONFIG_OF_BOARD
897 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use the device tree 892 If this variable is defined, U-Boot will use the device tree
898 provided by the board at runtime instead of embedding one with 893 provided by the board at runtime instead of embedding one with
899 the image. Only boards defining board_fdt_blob_setup() support 894 the image. Only boards defining board_fdt_blob_setup() support
900 this option (see include/fdtdec.h file). 895 this option (see include/fdtdec.h file).
901 896
902 - Watchdog: 897 - Watchdog:
903 CONFIG_WATCHDOG 898 CONFIG_WATCHDOG
904 If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog 899 If this variable is defined, it enables watchdog
905 support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC 900 support for the SoC. There must be support in the SoC
906 specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx 901 specific code for a watchdog. For the 8xx
907 CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR 902 CPUs, the SIU Watchdog feature is enabled in the SYPCR
908 register. When supported for a specific SoC is 903 register. When supported for a specific SoC is
909 available, then no further board specific code should 904 available, then no further board specific code should
910 be needed to use it. 905 be needed to use it.
911 906
912 CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG 907 CONFIG_HW_WATCHDOG
913 When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used 908 When using a watchdog circuitry external to the used
914 SoC, then define this variable and provide board 909 SoC, then define this variable and provide board
915 specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function. 910 specific code for the "hw_watchdog_reset" function.
916 911
917 CONFIG_AT91_HW_WDT_TIMEOUT 912 CONFIG_AT91_HW_WDT_TIMEOUT
918 specify the timeout in seconds. default 2 seconds. 913 specify the timeout in seconds. default 2 seconds.
919 914
920 - U-Boot Version: 915 - U-Boot Version:
921 CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE 916 CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE
922 If this variable is defined, an environment variable 917 If this variable is defined, an environment variable
923 named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot 918 named "ver" is created by U-Boot showing the U-Boot
924 version as printed by the "version" command. 919 version as printed by the "version" command.
925 Any change to this variable will be reverted at the 920 Any change to this variable will be reverted at the
926 next reset. 921 next reset.
927 922
928 - Real-Time Clock: 923 - Real-Time Clock:
929 924
930 When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC 925 When CONFIG_CMD_DATE is selected, the type of the RTC
931 has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the 926 has to be selected, too. Define exactly one of the
932 following options: 927 following options:
933 928
934 CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC 929 CONFIG_RTC_PCF8563 - use Philips PCF8563 RTC
935 CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC 930 CONFIG_RTC_MC13XXX - use MC13783 or MC13892 RTC
936 CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC 931 CONFIG_RTC_MC146818 - use MC146818 RTC
937 CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC 932 CONFIG_RTC_DS1307 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1307 RTC
938 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC 933 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1337 RTC
939 CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC 934 CONFIG_RTC_DS1338 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1338 RTC
940 CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC 935 CONFIG_RTC_DS1339 - use Maxim, Inc. DS1339 RTC
941 CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC 936 CONFIG_RTC_DS164x - use Dallas DS164x RTC
942 CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC 937 CONFIG_RTC_ISL1208 - use Intersil ISL1208 RTC
943 CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC 938 CONFIG_RTC_MAX6900 - use Maxim, Inc. MAX6900 RTC
944 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337 939 CONFIG_RTC_DS1337_NOOSC - Turn off the OSC output for DS1337
945 CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on 940 CONFIG_SYS_RV3029_TCR - enable trickle charger on
946 RV3029 RTC. 941 RV3029 RTC.
947 942
948 Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface 943 Note that if the RTC uses I2C, then the I2C interface
949 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. 944 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
950 945
951 - GPIO Support: 946 - GPIO Support:
952 CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO 947 CONFIG_PCA953X - use NXP's PCA953X series I2C GPIO
953 948
954 The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of 949 The CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PCA953X_WIDTH option specifies a list of
955 chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of 950 chip-ngpio pairs that tell the PCA953X driver the number of
956 pins supported by a particular chip. 951 pins supported by a particular chip.
957 952
958 Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface 953 Note that if the GPIO device uses I2C, then the I2C interface
959 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below. 954 must also be configured. See I2C Support, below.
960 955
961 - I/O tracing: 956 - I/O tracing:
962 When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O 957 When CONFIG_IO_TRACE is selected, U-Boot intercepts all I/O
963 accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out 958 accesses and can checksum them or write a list of them out
964 to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is 959 to memory. See the 'iotrace' command for details. This is
965 useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that 960 useful for testing device drivers since it can confirm that
966 the driver behaves the same way before and after a code 961 the driver behaves the same way before and after a code
967 change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To 962 change. Currently this is supported on sandbox and arm. To
968 add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>' 963 add support for your architecture, add '#include <iotrace.h>'
969 to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test. 964 to the bottom of arch/<arch>/include/asm/io.h and test.
970 965
971 Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below. 966 Example output from the 'iotrace stats' command is below.
972 Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will 967 Note that if the trace buffer is exhausted, the checksum will
973 still continue to operate. 968 still continue to operate.
974 969
975 iotrace is enabled 970 iotrace is enabled
976 Start: 10000000 (buffer start address) 971 Start: 10000000 (buffer start address)
977 Size: 00010000 (buffer size) 972 Size: 00010000 (buffer size)
978 Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset) 973 Offset: 00000120 (current buffer offset)
979 Output: 10000120 (start + offset) 974 Output: 10000120 (start + offset)
980 Count: 00000018 (number of trace records) 975 Count: 00000018 (number of trace records)
981 CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records) 976 CRC32: 9526fb66 (CRC32 of all trace records)
982 977
983 - Timestamp Support: 978 - Timestamp Support:
984 979
985 When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp 980 When CONFIG_TIMESTAMP is selected, the timestamp
986 (date and time) of an image is printed by image 981 (date and time) of an image is printed by image
987 commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is 982 commands like bootm or iminfo. This option is
988 automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE . 983 automatically enabled when you select CONFIG_CMD_DATE .
989 984
990 - Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported: 985 - Partition Labels (disklabels) Supported:
991 Zero or more of the following: 986 Zero or more of the following:
992 CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table. 987 CONFIG_MAC_PARTITION Apple's MacOS partition table.
993 CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc. 988 CONFIG_ISO_PARTITION ISO partition table, used on CDROM etc.
994 CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the 989 CONFIG_EFI_PARTITION GPT partition table, common when EFI is the
995 bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see 990 bootloader. Note 2TB partition limit; see
996 disk/part_efi.c 991 disk/part_efi.c
997 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS Memory Technology Device partition table. 992 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS Memory Technology Device partition table.
998 993
999 If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_IDE or 994 If IDE or SCSI support is enabled (CONFIG_IDE or
1000 CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at 995 CONFIG_SCSI) you must configure support for at
1001 least one non-MTD partition type as well. 996 least one non-MTD partition type as well.
1002 997
1003 - IDE Reset method: 998 - IDE Reset method:
1004 CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several 999 CONFIG_IDE_RESET_ROUTINE - this is defined in several
1005 board configurations files but used nowhere! 1000 board configurations files but used nowhere!
1006 1001
1007 CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will 1002 CONFIG_IDE_RESET - is this is defined, IDE Reset will
1008 be performed by calling the function 1003 be performed by calling the function
1009 ide_set_reset(int reset) 1004 ide_set_reset(int reset)
1010 which has to be defined in a board specific file 1005 which has to be defined in a board specific file
1011 1006
1012 - ATAPI Support: 1007 - ATAPI Support:
1013 CONFIG_ATAPI 1008 CONFIG_ATAPI
1014 1009
1015 Set this to enable ATAPI support. 1010 Set this to enable ATAPI support.
1016 1011
1017 - LBA48 Support 1012 - LBA48 Support
1018 CONFIG_LBA48 1013 CONFIG_LBA48
1019 1014
1020 Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB 1015 Set this to enable support for disks larger than 137GB
1021 Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA. 1016 Also look at CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA.
1022 Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only' 1017 Whithout these , LBA48 support uses 32bit variables and will 'only'
1023 support disks up to 2.1TB. 1018 support disks up to 2.1TB.
1024 1019
1025 CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA: 1020 CONFIG_SYS_64BIT_LBA:
1026 When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses. 1021 When enabled, makes the IDE subsystem use 64bit sector addresses.
1027 Default is 32bit. 1022 Default is 32bit.
1028 1023
1029 - SCSI Support: 1024 - SCSI Support:
1030 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and 1025 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN [8], CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID [7] and
1031 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID * 1026 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_DEVICE [CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_SCSI_ID *
1032 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the 1027 CONFIG_SYS_SCSI_MAX_LUN] can be adjusted to define the
1033 maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target 1028 maximum numbers of LUNs, SCSI ID's and target
1034 devices. 1029 devices.
1035 1030
1036 The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of 1031 The environment variable 'scsidevs' is set to the number of
1037 SCSI devices found during the last scan. 1032 SCSI devices found during the last scan.
1038 1033
1039 - NETWORK Support (PCI): 1034 - NETWORK Support (PCI):
1040 CONFIG_E1000 1035 CONFIG_E1000
1041 Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips. 1036 Support for Intel 8254x/8257x gigabit chips.
1042 1037
1043 CONFIG_E1000_SPI 1038 CONFIG_E1000_SPI
1044 Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x. 1039 Utility code for direct access to the SPI bus on Intel 8257x.
1045 This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one 1040 This does not do anything useful unless you set at least one
1046 of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC. 1041 of CONFIG_CMD_E1000 or CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC.
1047 1042
1048 CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC 1043 CONFIG_E1000_SPI_GENERIC
1049 Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for 1044 Allow generic access to the SPI bus on the Intel 8257x, for
1050 example with the "sspi" command. 1045 example with the "sspi" command.
1051 1046
1052 CONFIG_CMD_E1000 1047 CONFIG_CMD_E1000
1053 Management command for E1000 devices. When used on devices 1048 Management command for E1000 devices. When used on devices
1054 with SPI support you can reprogram the EEPROM from U-Boot. 1049 with SPI support you can reprogram the EEPROM from U-Boot.
1055 1050
1056 CONFIG_EEPRO100 1051 CONFIG_EEPRO100
1057 Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips. 1052 Support for Intel 82557/82559/82559ER chips.
1058 Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM 1053 Optional CONFIG_EEPRO100_SROM_WRITE enables EEPROM
1059 write routine for first time initialisation. 1054 write routine for first time initialisation.
1060 1055
1061 CONFIG_TULIP 1056 CONFIG_TULIP
1062 Support for Digital 2114x chips. 1057 Support for Digital 2114x chips.
1063 Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific 1058 Optional CONFIG_TULIP_SELECT_MEDIA for board specific
1064 modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611). 1059 modem chip initialisation (KS8761/QS6611).
1065 1060
1066 CONFIG_NATSEMI 1061 CONFIG_NATSEMI
1067 Support for National dp83815 chips. 1062 Support for National dp83815 chips.
1068 1063
1069 CONFIG_NS8382X 1064 CONFIG_NS8382X
1070 Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips. 1065 Support for National dp8382[01] gigabit chips.
1071 1066
1072 - NETWORK Support (other): 1067 - NETWORK Support (other):
1073 1068
1074 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC 1069 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC
1075 Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC. 1070 Support for AT91RM9200 EMAC.
1076 1071
1077 CONFIG_RMII 1072 CONFIG_RMII
1078 Define this to use reduced MII inteface 1073 Define this to use reduced MII inteface
1079 1074
1080 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET 1075 CONFIG_DRIVER_AT91EMAC_QUIET
1081 If this defined, the driver is quiet. 1076 If this defined, the driver is quiet.
1082 The driver doen't show link status messages. 1077 The driver doen't show link status messages.
1083 1078
1084 CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC 1079 CONFIG_CALXEDA_XGMAC
1085 Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device 1080 Support for the Calxeda XGMAC device
1086 1081
1087 CONFIG_LAN91C96 1082 CONFIG_LAN91C96
1088 Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips. 1083 Support for SMSC's LAN91C96 chips.
1089 1084
1090 CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT 1085 CONFIG_LAN91C96_USE_32_BIT
1091 Define this to enable 32 bit addressing 1086 Define this to enable 32 bit addressing
1092 1087
1093 CONFIG_SMC91111 1088 CONFIG_SMC91111
1094 Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip 1089 Support for SMSC's LAN91C111 chip
1095 1090
1096 CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE 1091 CONFIG_SMC91111_BASE
1097 Define this to hold the physical address 1092 Define this to hold the physical address
1098 of the device (I/O space) 1093 of the device (I/O space)
1099 1094
1100 CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT 1095 CONFIG_SMC_USE_32_BIT
1101 Define this if data bus is 32 bits 1096 Define this if data bus is 32 bits
1102 1097
1103 CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS 1098 CONFIG_SMC_USE_IOFUNCS
1104 Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros 1099 Define this to use i/o functions instead of macros
1105 (some hardware wont work with macros) 1100 (some hardware wont work with macros)
1106 1101
1107 CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC 1102 CONFIG_DRIVER_TI_EMAC
1108 Support for davinci emac 1103 Support for davinci emac
1109 1104
1110 CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT 1105 CONFIG_SYS_DAVINCI_EMAC_PHY_COUNT
1111 Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs. 1106 Define this if you have more then 3 PHYs.
1112 1107
1113 CONFIG_FTGMAC100 1108 CONFIG_FTGMAC100
1114 Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet 1109 Support for Faraday's FTGMAC100 Gigabit SoC Ethernet
1115 1110
1116 CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA 1111 CONFIG_FTGMAC100_EGIGA
1117 Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY. 1112 Define this to use GE link update with gigabit PHY.
1118 Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY. 1113 Define this if FTGMAC100 is connected to gigabit PHY.
1119 If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur 1114 If your system has 10/100 PHY only, it might not occur
1120 wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or 1115 wrong behavior. Because PHY usually return timeout or
1121 useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit 1116 useless data when polling gigabit status and gigabit
1122 control registers. This behavior won't affect the 1117 control registers. This behavior won't affect the
1123 correctnessof 10/100 link speed update. 1118 correctnessof 10/100 link speed update.
1124 1119
1125 CONFIG_SMC911X 1120 CONFIG_SMC911X
1126 Support for SMSC's LAN911x and LAN921x chips 1121 Support for SMSC's LAN911x and LAN921x chips
1127 1122
1128 CONFIG_SMC911X_BASE 1123 CONFIG_SMC911X_BASE
1129 Define this to hold the physical address 1124 Define this to hold the physical address
1130 of the device (I/O space) 1125 of the device (I/O space)
1131 1126
1132 CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT 1127 CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT
1133 Define this if data bus is 32 bits 1128 Define this if data bus is 32 bits
1134 1129
1135 CONFIG_SMC911X_16_BIT 1130 CONFIG_SMC911X_16_BIT
1136 Define this if data bus is 16 bits. If your processor 1131 Define this if data bus is 16 bits. If your processor
1137 automatically converts one 32 bit word to two 16 bit 1132 automatically converts one 32 bit word to two 16 bit
1138 words you may also try CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT. 1133 words you may also try CONFIG_SMC911X_32_BIT.
1139 1134
1140 CONFIG_SH_ETHER 1135 CONFIG_SH_ETHER
1141 Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller 1136 Support for Renesas on-chip Ethernet controller
1142 1137
1143 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT 1138 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_USE_PORT
1144 Define the number of ports to be used 1139 Define the number of ports to be used
1145 1140
1146 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR 1141 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_PHY_ADDR
1147 Define the ETH PHY's address 1142 Define the ETH PHY's address
1148 1143
1149 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK 1144 CONFIG_SH_ETHER_CACHE_WRITEBACK
1150 If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush. 1145 If this option is set, the driver enables cache flush.
1151 1146
1152 - PWM Support: 1147 - PWM Support:
1153 CONFIG_PWM_IMX 1148 CONFIG_PWM_IMX
1154 Support for PWM module on the imx6. 1149 Support for PWM module on the imx6.
1155 1150
1156 - TPM Support: 1151 - TPM Support:
1157 CONFIG_TPM 1152 CONFIG_TPM
1158 Support TPM devices. 1153 Support TPM devices.
1159 1154
1160 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON 1155 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_INFINEON
1161 Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device 1156 Support for Infineon i2c bus TPM devices. Only one device
1162 per system is supported at this time. 1157 per system is supported at this time.
1163 1158
1164 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION 1159 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_I2C_BURST_LIMITATION
1165 Define the burst count bytes upper limit 1160 Define the burst count bytes upper limit
1166 1161
1167 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24 1162 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24
1168 Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support. 1163 Support for STMicroelectronics TPM devices. Requires DM_TPM support.
1169 1164
1170 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C 1165 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_I2C
1171 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices. 1166 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 I2C devices.
1172 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C. 1167 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and I2C.
1173 1168
1174 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI 1169 CONFIG_TPM_ST33ZP24_SPI
1175 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices. 1170 Support for STMicroelectronics ST33ZP24 SPI devices.
1176 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI. 1171 Requires TPM_ST33ZP24 and SPI.
1177 1172
1178 CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI 1173 CONFIG_TPM_ATMEL_TWI
1179 Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support. 1174 Support for Atmel TWI TPM device. Requires I2C support.
1180 1175
1181 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC 1176 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_LPC
1182 Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device 1177 Support for generic parallel port TPM devices. Only one device
1183 per system is supported at this time. 1178 per system is supported at this time.
1184 1179
1185 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS 1180 CONFIG_TPM_TIS_BASE_ADDRESS
1186 Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped 1181 Base address where the generic TPM device is mapped
1187 to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at 1182 to. Contemporary x86 systems usually map it at
1188 0xfed40000. 1183 0xfed40000.
1189 1184
1190 CONFIG_CMD_TPM 1185 CONFIG_CMD_TPM
1191 Add tpm monitor functions. 1186 Add tpm monitor functions.
1192 Requires CONFIG_TPM. If CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS is set, also 1187 Requires CONFIG_TPM. If CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS is set, also
1193 provides monitor access to authorized functions. 1188 provides monitor access to authorized functions.
1194 1189
1195 CONFIG_TPM 1190 CONFIG_TPM
1196 Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides 1191 Define this to enable the TPM support library which provides
1197 functional interfaces to some TPM commands. 1192 functional interfaces to some TPM commands.
1198 Requires support for a TPM device. 1193 Requires support for a TPM device.
1199 1194
1200 CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS 1195 CONFIG_TPM_AUTH_SESSIONS
1201 Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library. 1196 Define this to enable authorized functions in the TPM library.
1202 Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1. 1197 Requires CONFIG_TPM and CONFIG_SHA1.
1203 1198
1204 - USB Support: 1199 - USB Support:
1205 At the moment only the UHCI host controller is 1200 At the moment only the UHCI host controller is
1206 supported (PIP405, MIP405); define 1201 supported (PIP405, MIP405); define
1207 CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it. 1202 CONFIG_USB_UHCI to enable it.
1208 define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard 1203 define CONFIG_USB_KEYBOARD to enable the USB Keyboard
1209 and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB 1204 and define CONFIG_USB_STORAGE to enable the USB
1210 storage devices. 1205 storage devices.
1211 Note: 1206 Note:
1212 Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives 1207 Supported are USB Keyboards and USB Floppy drives
1213 (TEAC FD-05PUB). 1208 (TEAC FD-05PUB).
1214 1209
1215 CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the 1210 CONFIG_USB_EHCI_TXFIFO_THRESH enables setting of the
1216 txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset. 1211 txfilltuning field in the EHCI controller on reset.
1217 1212
1218 CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2 1213 CONFIG_USB_DWC2_REG_ADDR the physical CPU address of the DWC2
1219 HW module registers. 1214 HW module registers.
1220 1215
1221 - USB Device: 1216 - USB Device:
1222 Define the below if you wish to use the USB console. 1217 Define the below if you wish to use the USB console.
1223 Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the 1218 Once firmware is rebuilt from a serial console issue the
1224 command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and 1219 command "setenv stdin usbtty; setenv stdout usbtty" and
1225 attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print 1220 attach your USB cable. The Unix command "dmesg" should print
1226 it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty 1221 it has found a new device. The environment variable usbtty
1227 can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to 1222 can be set to gserial or cdc_acm to enable your device to
1228 appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a 1223 appear to a USB host as a Linux gserial device or a
1229 Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device. 1224 Common Device Class Abstract Control Model serial device.
1230 If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate 1225 If you select usbtty = gserial you should be able to enumerate
1231 a Linux host by 1226 a Linux host by
1232 # modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID 1227 # modprobe usbserial vendor=0xVendorID product=0xProductID
1233 else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment 1228 else if using cdc_acm, simply setting the environment
1234 variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following 1229 variable usbtty to be cdc_acm should suffice. The following
1235 might be defined in YourBoardName.h 1230 might be defined in YourBoardName.h
1236 1231
1237 CONFIG_USB_DEVICE 1232 CONFIG_USB_DEVICE
1238 Define this to build a UDC device 1233 Define this to build a UDC device
1239 1234
1240 CONFIG_USB_TTY 1235 CONFIG_USB_TTY
1241 Define this to have a tty type of device available to 1236 Define this to have a tty type of device available to
1242 talk to the UDC device 1237 talk to the UDC device
1243 1238
1244 CONFIG_USBD_HS 1239 CONFIG_USBD_HS
1245 Define this to enable the high speed support for usb 1240 Define this to enable the high speed support for usb
1246 device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine 1241 device and usbtty. If this feature is enabled, a routine
1247 int is_usbd_high_speed(void) 1242 int is_usbd_high_speed(void)
1248 also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll 1243 also needs to be defined by the driver to dynamically poll
1249 whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full 1244 whether the enumeration has succeded at high speed or full
1250 speed. 1245 speed.
1251 1246
1252 CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV 1247 CONFIG_SYS_CONSOLE_IS_IN_ENV
1253 Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to 1248 Define this if you want stdin, stdout &/or stderr to
1254 be set to usbtty. 1249 be set to usbtty.
1255 1250
1256 If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to 1251 If you have a USB-IF assigned VendorID then you may wish to
1257 define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h 1252 define your own vendor specific values either in BoardName.h
1258 or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define 1253 or directly in usbd_vendor_info.h. If you don't define
1259 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME, 1254 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER, CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME,
1260 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot 1255 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID and CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID, then U-Boot
1261 should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host. 1256 should pretend to be a Linux device to it's target host.
1262 1257
1263 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER 1258 CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER
1264 Define this string as the name of your company for 1259 Define this string as the name of your company for
1265 - CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company" 1260 - CONFIG_USBD_MANUFACTURER "my company"
1266 1261
1267 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME 1262 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME
1268 Define this string as the name of your product 1263 Define this string as the name of your product
1269 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device" 1264 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCT_NAME "acme usb device"
1270 1265
1271 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 1266 CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID
1272 Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB 1267 Define this as your assigned Vendor ID from the USB
1273 Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID 1268 Implementors Forum. This *must* be a genuine Vendor ID
1274 to avoid polluting the USB namespace. 1269 to avoid polluting the USB namespace.
1275 - CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF 1270 - CONFIG_USBD_VENDORID 0xFFFF
1276 1271
1277 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 1272 CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID
1278 Define this as the unique Product ID 1273 Define this as the unique Product ID
1279 for your device 1274 for your device
1280 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF 1275 - CONFIG_USBD_PRODUCTID 0xFFFF
1281 1276
1282 - ULPI Layer Support: 1277 - ULPI Layer Support:
1283 The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via 1278 The ULPI (UTMI Low Pin (count) Interface) PHYs are supported via
1284 the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY 1279 the generic ULPI layer. The generic layer accesses the ULPI PHY
1285 via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and 1280 via the platform viewport, so you need both the genric layer and
1286 the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based 1281 the viewport enabled. Currently only Chipidea/ARC based
1287 viewport is supported. 1282 viewport is supported.
1288 To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and 1283 To enable the ULPI layer support, define CONFIG_USB_ULPI and
1289 CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file. 1284 CONFIG_USB_ULPI_VIEWPORT in your board configuration file.
1290 If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the 1285 If your ULPI phy needs a different reference clock than the
1291 standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to 1286 standard 24 MHz then you have to define CONFIG_ULPI_REF_CLK to
1292 the appropriate value in Hz. 1287 the appropriate value in Hz.
1293 1288
1294 - MMC Support: 1289 - MMC Support:
1295 The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To 1290 The MMC controller on the Intel PXA is supported. To
1296 enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be 1291 enable this define CONFIG_MMC. The MMC can be
1297 accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device 1292 accessed from the boot prompt by mapping the device
1298 to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is 1293 to physical memory similar to flash. Command line is
1299 enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with 1294 enabled with CONFIG_CMD_MMC. The MMC driver also works with
1300 the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT. 1295 the FAT fs. This is enabled with CONFIG_CMD_FAT.
1301 1296
1302 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF 1297 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF
1303 Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller 1298 Support for Renesas on-chip MMCIF controller
1304 1299
1305 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR 1300 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_ADDR
1306 Define the base address of MMCIF registers 1301 Define the base address of MMCIF registers
1307 1302
1308 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK 1303 CONFIG_SH_MMCIF_CLK
1309 Define the clock frequency for MMCIF 1304 Define the clock frequency for MMCIF
1310 1305
1311 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT 1306 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_BOOT
1312 Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions. 1307 Enable some additional features of the eMMC boot partitions.
1313 1308
1314 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB 1309 CONFIG_SUPPORT_EMMC_RPMB
1315 Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the 1310 Enable the commands for reading, writing and programming the
1316 key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC. 1311 key for the Replay Protection Memory Block partition in eMMC.
1317 1312
1318 - USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support: 1313 - USB Device Firmware Update (DFU) class support:
1319 CONFIG_USB_FUNCTION_DFU 1314 CONFIG_USB_FUNCTION_DFU
1320 This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class 1315 This enables the USB portion of the DFU USB class
1321 1316
1322 CONFIG_CMD_DFU 1317 CONFIG_CMD_DFU
1323 This enables the command "dfu" which is used to have 1318 This enables the command "dfu" which is used to have
1324 U-Boot create a DFU class device via USB. This command 1319 U-Boot create a DFU class device via USB. This command
1325 requires that the "dfu_alt_info" environment variable be 1320 requires that the "dfu_alt_info" environment variable be
1326 set and define the alt settings to expose to the host. 1321 set and define the alt settings to expose to the host.
1327 1322
1328 CONFIG_DFU_MMC 1323 CONFIG_DFU_MMC
1329 This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU. 1324 This enables support for exposing (e)MMC devices via DFU.
1330 1325
1331 CONFIG_DFU_NAND 1326 CONFIG_DFU_NAND
1332 This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU. 1327 This enables support for exposing NAND devices via DFU.
1333 1328
1334 CONFIG_DFU_RAM 1329 CONFIG_DFU_RAM
1335 This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU. 1330 This enables support for exposing RAM via DFU.
1336 Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but 1331 Note: DFU spec refer to non-volatile memory usage, but
1337 allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage, 1332 allow usages beyond the scope of spec - here RAM usage,
1338 one that would help mostly the developer. 1333 one that would help mostly the developer.
1339 1334
1340 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE 1335 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_DATA_BUF_SIZE
1341 Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the 1336 Dfu transfer uses a buffer before writing data to the
1342 raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer 1337 raw storage device. Make the size (in bytes) of this buffer
1343 configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable 1338 configurable. The size of this buffer is also configurable
1344 through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable. 1339 through the "dfu_bufsiz" environment variable.
1345 1340
1346 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE 1341 CONFIG_SYS_DFU_MAX_FILE_SIZE
1347 When updating files rather than the raw storage device, 1342 When updating files rather than the raw storage device,
1348 we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write 1343 we use a static buffer to copy the file into and then write
1349 the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define 1344 the buffer once we've been given the whole file. Define
1350 this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer. 1345 this to the maximum filesize (in bytes) for the buffer.
1351 Default is 4 MiB if undefined. 1346 Default is 4 MiB if undefined.
1352 1347
1353 DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT 1348 DFU_DEFAULT_POLL_TIMEOUT
1354 Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the 1349 Poll timeout [ms], is the timeout a device can send to the
1355 host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending 1350 host. The host must wait for this timeout before sending
1356 a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device. 1351 a subsequent DFU_GET_STATUS request to the device.
1357 1352
1358 DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT 1353 DFU_MANIFEST_POLL_TIMEOUT
1359 Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when 1354 Poll timeout [ms], which the device sends to the host when
1360 entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before 1355 entering dfuMANIFEST state. Host waits this timeout, before
1361 sending again an USB request to the device. 1356 sending again an USB request to the device.
1362 1357
1363 - USB Device Android Fastboot support: 1358 - USB Device Android Fastboot support:
1364 CONFIG_USB_FUNCTION_FASTBOOT 1359 CONFIG_USB_FUNCTION_FASTBOOT
1365 This enables the USB part of the fastboot gadget 1360 This enables the USB part of the fastboot gadget
1366 1361
1367 CONFIG_CMD_FASTBOOT 1362 CONFIG_CMD_FASTBOOT
1368 This enables the command "fastboot" which enables the Android 1363 This enables the command "fastboot" which enables the Android
1369 fastboot mode for the platform's USB device. Fastboot is a USB 1364 fastboot mode for the platform's USB device. Fastboot is a USB
1370 protocol for downloading images, flashing and device control 1365 protocol for downloading images, flashing and device control
1371 used on Android devices. 1366 used on Android devices.
1372 See doc/README.android-fastboot for more information. 1367 See doc/README.android-fastboot for more information.
1373 1368
1374 CONFIG_ANDROID_BOOT_IMAGE 1369 CONFIG_ANDROID_BOOT_IMAGE
1375 This enables support for booting images which use the Android 1370 This enables support for booting images which use the Android
1376 image format header. 1371 image format header.
1377 1372
1378 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_BUF_ADDR 1373 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_BUF_ADDR
1379 The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for 1374 The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for
1380 downloads. Define this to the starting RAM address to use for 1375 downloads. Define this to the starting RAM address to use for
1381 downloaded images. 1376 downloaded images.
1382 1377
1383 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_BUF_SIZE 1378 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_BUF_SIZE
1384 The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for 1379 The fastboot protocol requires a large memory buffer for
1385 downloads. This buffer should be as large as possible for a 1380 downloads. This buffer should be as large as possible for a
1386 platform. Define this to the size available RAM for fastboot. 1381 platform. Define this to the size available RAM for fastboot.
1387 1382
1388 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH 1383 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH
1389 The fastboot protocol includes a "flash" command for writing 1384 The fastboot protocol includes a "flash" command for writing
1390 the downloaded image to a non-volatile storage device. Define 1385 the downloaded image to a non-volatile storage device. Define
1391 this to enable the "fastboot flash" command. 1386 this to enable the "fastboot flash" command.
1392 1387
1393 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH_MMC_DEV 1388 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_FLASH_MMC_DEV
1394 The fastboot "flash" command requires additional information 1389 The fastboot "flash" command requires additional information
1395 regarding the non-volatile storage device. Define this to 1390 regarding the non-volatile storage device. Define this to
1396 the eMMC device that fastboot should use to store the image. 1391 the eMMC device that fastboot should use to store the image.
1397 1392
1398 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_GPT_NAME 1393 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_GPT_NAME
1399 The fastboot "flash" command supports writing the downloaded 1394 The fastboot "flash" command supports writing the downloaded
1400 image to the Protective MBR and the Primary GUID Partition 1395 image to the Protective MBR and the Primary GUID Partition
1401 Table. (Additionally, this downloaded image is post-processed 1396 Table. (Additionally, this downloaded image is post-processed
1402 to generate and write the Backup GUID Partition Table.) 1397 to generate and write the Backup GUID Partition Table.)
1403 This occurs when the specified "partition name" on the 1398 This occurs when the specified "partition name" on the
1404 "fastboot flash" command line matches this value. 1399 "fastboot flash" command line matches this value.
1405 The default is "gpt" if undefined. 1400 The default is "gpt" if undefined.
1406 1401
1407 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_MBR_NAME 1402 CONFIG_FASTBOOT_MBR_NAME
1408 The fastboot "flash" command supports writing the downloaded 1403 The fastboot "flash" command supports writing the downloaded
1409 image to DOS MBR. 1404 image to DOS MBR.
1410 This occurs when the "partition name" specified on the 1405 This occurs when the "partition name" specified on the
1411 "fastboot flash" command line matches this value. 1406 "fastboot flash" command line matches this value.
1412 If not defined the default value "mbr" is used. 1407 If not defined the default value "mbr" is used.
1413 1408
1414 - Journaling Flash filesystem support: 1409 - Journaling Flash filesystem support:
1415 CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND 1410 CONFIG_JFFS2_NAND
1416 Define these for a default partition on a NAND device 1411 Define these for a default partition on a NAND device
1417 1412
1418 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR, 1413 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_SECTOR,
1419 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS 1414 CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_FIRST_BANK, CONFIG_SYS_JFFS2_NUM_BANKS
1420 Define these for a default partition on a NOR device 1415 Define these for a default partition on a NOR device
1421 1416
1422 - Keyboard Support: 1417 - Keyboard Support:
1423 See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers. 1418 See Kconfig help for available keyboard drivers.
1424 1419
1425 CONFIG_KEYBOARD 1420 CONFIG_KEYBOARD
1426 1421
1427 Define this to enable a custom keyboard support. 1422 Define this to enable a custom keyboard support.
1428 This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be 1423 This simply calls drv_keyboard_init() which must be
1429 defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated 1424 defined in your board-specific files. This option is deprecated
1430 and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model 1425 and is only used by novena. For new boards, use driver model
1431 instead. 1426 instead.
1432 1427
1433 - Video support: 1428 - Video support:
1434 CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB 1429 CONFIG_FSL_DIU_FB
1435 Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for 1430 Enable the Freescale DIU video driver. Reference boards for
1436 SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU 1431 SOCs that have a DIU should define this macro to enable DIU
1437 support, and should also define these other macros: 1432 support, and should also define these other macros:
1438 1433
1439 CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR 1434 CONFIG_SYS_DIU_ADDR
1440 CONFIG_VIDEO 1435 CONFIG_VIDEO
1441 CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE 1436 CONFIG_CFB_CONSOLE
1442 CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR 1437 CONFIG_VIDEO_SW_CURSOR
1443 CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE 1438 CONFIG_VGA_AS_SINGLE_DEVICE
1444 CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO 1439 CONFIG_VIDEO_LOGO
1445 CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO 1440 CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_LOGO
1446 1441
1447 The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment 1442 The DIU driver will look for the 'video-mode' environment
1448 variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during 1443 variable, and if defined, enable the DIU as a console during
1449 boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a 1444 boot. See the documentation file doc/README.video for a
1450 description of this variable. 1445 description of this variable.
1451 1446
1452 - LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD 1447 - LCD Support: CONFIG_LCD
1453 1448
1454 Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD 1449 Define this to enable LCD support (for output to LCD
1455 display); also select one of the supported displays 1450 display); also select one of the supported displays
1456 by defining one of these: 1451 by defining one of these:
1457 1452
1458 CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD: 1453 CONFIG_ATMEL_LCD:
1459 1454
1460 HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320. 1455 HITACHI TX09D70VM1CCA, 3.5", 240x320.
1461 1456
1462 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33: 1457 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448AC33:
1463 1458
1464 NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan. 1459 NEC NL6448AC33-18. Active, color, single scan.
1465 1460
1466 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20 1461 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC20
1467 1462
1468 NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480. 1463 NEC NL6448BC20-08. 6.5", 640x480.
1469 Active, color, single scan. 1464 Active, color, single scan.
1470 1465
1471 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54 1466 CONFIG_NEC_NL6448BC33_54
1472 1467
1473 NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480. 1468 NEC NL6448BC33-54. 10.4", 640x480.
1474 Active, color, single scan. 1469 Active, color, single scan.
1475 1470
1476 CONFIG_SHARP_16x9 1471 CONFIG_SHARP_16x9
1477 1472
1478 Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan. 1473 Sharp 320x240. Active, color, single scan.
1479 It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is. 1474 It isn't 16x9, and I am not sure what it is.
1480 1475
1481 CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341 1476 CONFIG_SHARP_LQ64D341
1482 1477
1483 Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480. 1478 Sharp LQ64D341 display, 640x480.
1484 Active, color, single scan. 1479 Active, color, single scan.
1485 1480
1486 CONFIG_HLD1045 1481 CONFIG_HLD1045
1487 1482
1488 HLD1045 display, 640x480. 1483 HLD1045 display, 640x480.
1489 Active, color, single scan. 1484 Active, color, single scan.
1490 1485
1491 CONFIG_OPTREX_BW 1486 CONFIG_OPTREX_BW
1492 1487
1493 Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5 1488 Optrex CBL50840-2 NF-FW 99 22 M5
1494 or 1489 or
1495 Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T 1490 Hitachi LMG6912RPFC-00T
1496 or 1491 or
1497 Hitachi SP14Q002 1492 Hitachi SP14Q002
1498 1493
1499 320x240. Black & white. 1494 320x240. Black & white.
1500 1495
1501 CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT 1496 CONFIG_LCD_ALIGNMENT
1502 1497
1503 Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is 1498 Normally the LCD is page-aligned (typically 4KB). If this is
1504 defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead. 1499 defined then the LCD will be aligned to this value instead.
1505 For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE 1500 For ARM it is sometimes useful to use MMU_SECTION_SIZE
1506 here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on 1501 here, since it is cheaper to change data cache settings on
1507 a per-section basis. 1502 a per-section basis.
1508 1503
1509 1504
1510 CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION 1505 CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION
1511 1506
1512 Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait 1507 Sometimes, for example if the display is mounted in portrait
1513 mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree, 1508 mode or even if it's mounted landscape but rotated by 180degree,
1514 we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the 1509 we need to rotate our content of the display relative to the
1515 framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are 1510 framebuffer, so that user can read the messages which are
1516 printed out. 1511 printed out.
1517 Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be 1512 Once CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is defined, the lcd_console will be
1518 initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of 1513 initialized with a given rotation from "vl_rot" out of
1519 "vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code. 1514 "vidinfo_t" which is provided by the board specific code.
1520 The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to 1515 The value for vl_rot is coded as following (matching to
1521 fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline): 1516 fbcon=rotate:<n> linux-kernel commandline):
1522 0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree 1517 0 = no rotation respectively 0 degree
1523 1 = 90 degree rotation 1518 1 = 90 degree rotation
1524 2 = 180 degree rotation 1519 2 = 180 degree rotation
1525 3 = 270 degree rotation 1520 3 = 270 degree rotation
1526 1521
1527 If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be 1522 If CONFIG_LCD_ROTATION is not defined, the console will be
1528 initialized with 0degree rotation. 1523 initialized with 0degree rotation.
1529 1524
1530 CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8 1525 CONFIG_LCD_BMP_RLE8
1531 1526
1532 Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD. 1527 Support drawing of RLE8-compressed bitmaps on the LCD.
1533 1528
1534 CONFIG_I2C_EDID 1529 CONFIG_I2C_EDID
1535 1530
1536 Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID 1531 Enables an 'i2c edid' command which can read EDID
1537 information over I2C from an attached LCD display. 1532 information over I2C from an attached LCD display.
1538 1533
1539 - Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN 1534 - Splash Screen Support: CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN
1540 1535
1541 If this option is set, the environment is checked for 1536 If this option is set, the environment is checked for
1542 a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display 1537 a variable "splashimage". If found, the usual display
1543 of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD 1538 of logo, copyright and system information on the LCD
1544 is suppressed and the BMP image at the address 1539 is suppressed and the BMP image at the address
1545 specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The 1540 specified in "splashimage" is loaded instead. The
1546 console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This 1541 console is redirected to the "nulldev", too. This
1547 allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is 1542 allows for a "silent" boot where a splash screen is
1548 loaded very quickly after power-on. 1543 loaded very quickly after power-on.
1549 1544
1550 CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD 1545 CONFIG_SPLASHIMAGE_GUARD
1551 1546
1552 If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment 1547 If this option is set, then U-Boot will prevent the environment
1553 variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address 1548 variable "splashimage" from being set to a problematic address
1554 (see doc/README.displaying-bmps). 1549 (see doc/README.displaying-bmps).
1555 This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment 1550 This option is useful for targets where, due to alignment
1556 restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data 1551 restrictions, an improperly aligned BMP image will cause a data
1557 abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned 1552 abort. If you think you will not have problems with unaligned
1558 accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them) 1553 accesses (for example because your toolchain prevents them)
1559 there is no need to set this option. 1554 there is no need to set this option.
1560 1555
1561 CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN 1556 CONFIG_SPLASH_SCREEN_ALIGN
1562 1557
1563 If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned 1558 If this option is set the splash image can be freely positioned
1564 on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the 1559 on the screen. Environment variable "splashpos" specifies the
1565 position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as 1560 position as "x,y". If a positive number is given it is used as
1566 number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it 1561 number of pixel from left/top. If a negative number is given it
1567 is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also 1562 is used as number of pixel from right/bottom. You can also
1568 specify 'm' for centering the image. 1563 specify 'm' for centering the image.
1569 1564
1570 Example: 1565 Example:
1571 setenv splashpos m,m 1566 setenv splashpos m,m
1572 => image at center of screen 1567 => image at center of screen
1573 1568
1574 setenv splashpos 30,20 1569 setenv splashpos 30,20
1575 => image at x = 30 and y = 20 1570 => image at x = 30 and y = 20
1576 1571
1577 setenv splashpos -10,m 1572 setenv splashpos -10,m
1578 => vertically centered image 1573 => vertically centered image
1579 at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9 1574 at x = dspWidth - bmpWidth - 9
1580 1575
1581 - Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP 1576 - Gzip compressed BMP image support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_GZIP
1582 1577
1583 If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP 1578 If this option is set, additionally to standard BMP
1584 images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the 1579 images, gzipped BMP images can be displayed via the
1585 splashscreen support or the bmp command. 1580 splashscreen support or the bmp command.
1586 1581
1587 - Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8 1582 - Run length encoded BMP image (RLE8) support: CONFIG_VIDEO_BMP_RLE8
1588 1583
1589 If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images 1584 If this option is set, 8-bit RLE compressed BMP images
1590 can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the 1585 can be displayed via the splashscreen support or the
1591 bmp command. 1586 bmp command.
1592 1587
1593 - Compression support: 1588 - Compression support:
1594 CONFIG_GZIP 1589 CONFIG_GZIP
1595 1590
1596 Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images. 1591 Enabled by default to support gzip compressed images.
1597 1592
1598 CONFIG_BZIP2 1593 CONFIG_BZIP2
1599 1594
1600 If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed 1595 If this option is set, support for bzip2 compressed
1601 images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip 1596 images is included. If not, only uncompressed and gzip
1602 compressed images are supported. 1597 compressed images are supported.
1603 1598
1604 NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so 1599 NOTE: the bzip2 algorithm requires a lot of RAM, so
1605 the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should 1600 the malloc area (as defined by CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN) should
1606 be at least 4MB. 1601 be at least 4MB.
1607 1602
1608 - MII/PHY support: 1603 - MII/PHY support:
1609 CONFIG_PHY_ADDR 1604 CONFIG_PHY_ADDR
1610 1605
1611 The address of PHY on MII bus. 1606 The address of PHY on MII bus.
1612 1607
1613 CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx) 1608 CONFIG_PHY_CLOCK_FREQ (ppc4xx)
1614 1609
1615 The clock frequency of the MII bus 1610 The clock frequency of the MII bus
1616 1611
1617 CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY 1612 CONFIG_PHY_RESET_DELAY
1618 1613
1619 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after 1614 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
1620 reset before any MII register access is possible. 1615 reset before any MII register access is possible.
1621 For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay 1616 For such PHY, set this option to the usec delay
1622 required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A) 1617 required. (minimum 300usec for LXT971A)
1623 1618
1624 CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx) 1619 CONFIG_PHY_CMD_DELAY (ppc4xx)
1625 1620
1626 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after 1621 Some PHY like Intel LXT971A need extra delay after
1627 command issued before MII status register can be read 1622 command issued before MII status register can be read
1628 1623
1629 - IP address: 1624 - IP address:
1630 CONFIG_IPADDR 1625 CONFIG_IPADDR
1631 1626
1632 Define a default value for the IP address to use for 1627 Define a default value for the IP address to use for
1633 the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not 1628 the default Ethernet interface, in case this is not
1634 determined through e.g. bootp. 1629 determined through e.g. bootp.
1635 (Environment variable "ipaddr") 1630 (Environment variable "ipaddr")
1636 1631
1637 - Server IP address: 1632 - Server IP address:
1638 CONFIG_SERVERIP 1633 CONFIG_SERVERIP
1639 1634
1640 Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP 1635 Defines a default value for the IP address of a TFTP
1641 server to contact when using the "tftboot" command. 1636 server to contact when using the "tftboot" command.
1642 (Environment variable "serverip") 1637 (Environment variable "serverip")
1643 1638
1644 CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR 1639 CONFIG_KEEP_SERVERADDR
1645 1640
1646 Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr' 1641 Keeps the server's MAC address, in the env 'serveraddr'
1647 for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option) 1642 for passing to bootargs (like Linux's netconsole option)
1648 1643
1649 - Gateway IP address: 1644 - Gateway IP address:
1650 CONFIG_GATEWAYIP 1645 CONFIG_GATEWAYIP
1651 1646
1652 Defines a default value for the IP address of the 1647 Defines a default value for the IP address of the
1653 default router where packets to other networks are 1648 default router where packets to other networks are
1654 sent to. 1649 sent to.
1655 (Environment variable "gatewayip") 1650 (Environment variable "gatewayip")
1656 1651
1657 - Subnet mask: 1652 - Subnet mask:
1658 CONFIG_NETMASK 1653 CONFIG_NETMASK
1659 1654
1660 Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or 1655 Defines a default value for the subnet mask (or
1661 routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP 1656 routing prefix) which is used to determine if an IP
1662 address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be 1657 address belongs to the local subnet or needs to be
1663 forwarded through a router. 1658 forwarded through a router.
1664 (Environment variable "netmask") 1659 (Environment variable "netmask")
1665 1660
1666 - Multicast TFTP Mode: 1661 - Multicast TFTP Mode:
1667 CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP 1662 CONFIG_MCAST_TFTP
1668 1663
1669 Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per 1664 Defines whether you want to support multicast TFTP as per
1670 rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp. Lets lots of targets 1665 rfc-2090; for example to work with atftp. Lets lots of targets
1671 tftp down the same boot image concurrently. Note: the Ethernet 1666 tftp down the same boot image concurrently. Note: the Ethernet
1672 driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a 1667 driver in use must provide a function: mcast() to join/leave a
1673 multicast group. 1668 multicast group.
1674 1669
1675 - BOOTP Recovery Mode: 1670 - BOOTP Recovery Mode:
1676 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY 1671 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY
1677 1672
1678 If you have many targets in a network that try to 1673 If you have many targets in a network that try to
1679 boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all 1674 boot using BOOTP, you may want to avoid that all
1680 systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same 1675 systems send out BOOTP requests at precisely the same
1681 moment (which would happen for instance at recovery 1676 moment (which would happen for instance at recovery
1682 from a power failure, when all systems will try to 1677 from a power failure, when all systems will try to
1683 boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining 1678 boot, thus flooding the BOOTP server. Defining
1684 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be 1679 CONFIG_BOOTP_RANDOM_DELAY causes a random delay to be
1685 inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The 1680 inserted before sending out BOOTP requests. The
1686 following delays are inserted then: 1681 following delays are inserted then:
1687 1682
1688 1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec 1683 1st BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 1 sec
1689 2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec 1684 2nd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 2 sec
1690 3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec 1685 3rd BOOTP request: delay 0 ... 4 sec
1691 4th and following 1686 4th and following
1692 BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec 1687 BOOTP requests: delay 0 ... 8 sec
1693 1688
1694 CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE 1689 CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE
1695 1690
1696 BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The 1691 BOOTP packets are uniquely identified using a 32-bit ID. The
1697 server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and 1692 server will copy the ID from client requests to responses and
1698 U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of 1693 U-Boot will use this to determine if it is the destination of
1699 an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses 1694 an incoming response. Some servers will check that addresses
1700 aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP 1695 aren't in use before handing them out (usually using an ARP
1701 ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to 1696 ping) and therefore take up to a few hundred milliseconds to
1702 respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it 1697 respond. Network congestion may also influence the time it
1703 takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that 1698 takes for a response to make it back to the client. If that
1704 time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order 1699 time is too long, U-Boot will retransmit requests. In order
1705 to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these 1700 to allow earlier responses to still be accepted after these
1706 retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of 1701 retransmissions, U-Boot's BOOTP client keeps a small cache of
1707 IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this 1702 IDs. The CONFIG_BOOTP_ID_CACHE_SIZE controls the size of this
1708 cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding 1703 cache. The default is to keep IDs for up to four outstanding
1709 requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers 1704 requests. Increasing this will allow U-Boot to accept offers
1710 from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency. 1705 from a BOOTP client in networks with unusually high latency.
1711 1706
1712 - DHCP Advanced Options: 1707 - DHCP Advanced Options:
1713 You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining 1708 You can fine tune the DHCP functionality by defining
1714 CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols: 1709 CONFIG_BOOTP_* symbols:
1715 1710
1716 CONFIG_BOOTP_SUBNETMASK 1711 CONFIG_BOOTP_SUBNETMASK
1717 CONFIG_BOOTP_GATEWAY 1712 CONFIG_BOOTP_GATEWAY
1718 CONFIG_BOOTP_HOSTNAME 1713 CONFIG_BOOTP_HOSTNAME
1719 CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN 1714 CONFIG_BOOTP_NISDOMAIN
1720 CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTPATH 1715 CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTPATH
1721 CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE 1716 CONFIG_BOOTP_BOOTFILESIZE
1722 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS 1717 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS
1723 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 1718 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2
1724 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME 1719 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME
1725 CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER 1720 CONFIG_BOOTP_NTPSERVER
1726 CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET 1721 CONFIG_BOOTP_TIMEOFFSET
1727 CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX 1722 CONFIG_BOOTP_VENDOREX
1728 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL 1723 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL
1729 1724
1730 CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip 1725 CONFIG_BOOTP_SERVERIP - TFTP server will be the serverip
1731 environment variable, not the BOOTP server. 1726 environment variable, not the BOOTP server.
1732 1727
1733 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found 1728 CONFIG_BOOTP_MAY_FAIL - If the DHCP server is not found
1734 after the configured retry count, the call will fail 1729 after the configured retry count, the call will fail
1735 instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over 1730 instead of starting over. This can be used to fail over
1736 to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server 1731 to Link-local IP address configuration if the DHCP server
1737 is not available. 1732 is not available.
1738 1733
1739 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 - If a DHCP client requests the DNS 1734 CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 - If a DHCP client requests the DNS
1740 serverip from a DHCP server, it is possible that more 1735 serverip from a DHCP server, it is possible that more
1741 than one DNS serverip is offered to the client. 1736 than one DNS serverip is offered to the client.
1742 If CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 is enabled, the secondary DNS 1737 If CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS2 is enabled, the secondary DNS
1743 serverip will be stored in the additional environment 1738 serverip will be stored in the additional environment
1744 variable "dnsip2". The first DNS serverip is always 1739 variable "dnsip2". The first DNS serverip is always
1745 stored in the variable "dnsip", when CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS 1740 stored in the variable "dnsip", when CONFIG_BOOTP_DNS
1746 is defined. 1741 is defined.
1747 1742
1748 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable 1743 CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME - Some DHCP servers are capable
1749 to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they 1744 to do a dynamic update of a DNS server. To do this, they
1750 need the hostname of the DHCP requester. 1745 need the hostname of the DHCP requester.
1751 If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content 1746 If CONFIG_BOOTP_SEND_HOSTNAME is defined, the content
1752 of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as 1747 of the "hostname" environment variable is passed as
1753 option 12 to the DHCP server. 1748 option 12 to the DHCP server.
1754 1749
1755 CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY 1750 CONFIG_BOOTP_DHCP_REQUEST_DELAY
1756 1751
1757 A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between 1752 A 32bit value in microseconds for a delay between
1758 receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request". 1753 receiving a "DHCP Offer" and sending the "DHCP Request".
1759 This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't 1754 This fixes a problem with certain DHCP servers that don't
1760 respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an 1755 respond 100% of the time to a "DHCP request". E.g. On an
1761 AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed 1756 AT91RM9200 processor running at 180MHz, this delay needed
1762 to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003 1757 to be *at least* 15,000 usec before a Windows Server 2003
1763 DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at 1758 DHCP server would reply 100% of the time. I recommend at
1764 least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope 1759 least 50,000 usec to be safe. The alternative is to hope
1765 that one of the retries will be successful but note that 1760 that one of the retries will be successful but note that
1766 the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than 1761 the DHCP timeout and retry process takes a longer than
1767 this delay. 1762 this delay.
1768 1763
1769 - Link-local IP address negotiation: 1764 - Link-local IP address negotiation:
1770 Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network 1765 Negotiate with other link-local clients on the local network
1771 for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration. 1766 for an address that doesn't require explicit configuration.
1772 This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed 1767 This is especially useful if a DHCP server cannot be guaranteed
1773 to exist in all environments that the device must operate. 1768 to exist in all environments that the device must operate.
1774 1769
1775 See doc/README.link-local for more information. 1770 See doc/README.link-local for more information.
1776 1771
1777 - CDP Options: 1772 - CDP Options:
1778 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID 1773 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID
1779 1774
1780 The device id used in CDP trigger frames. 1775 The device id used in CDP trigger frames.
1781 1776
1782 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX 1777 CONFIG_CDP_DEVICE_ID_PREFIX
1783 1778
1784 A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address 1779 A two character string which is prefixed to the MAC address
1785 of the device. 1780 of the device.
1786 1781
1787 CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID 1782 CONFIG_CDP_PORT_ID
1788 1783
1789 A printf format string which contains the ascii name of 1784 A printf format string which contains the ascii name of
1790 the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets 1785 the port. Normally is set to "eth%d" which sets
1791 eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc. 1786 eth0 for the first Ethernet, eth1 for the second etc.
1792 1787
1793 CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES 1788 CONFIG_CDP_CAPABILITIES
1794 1789
1795 A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities; 1790 A 32bit integer which indicates the device capabilities;
1796 0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards. 1791 0x00000010 for a normal host which does not forwards.
1797 1792
1798 CONFIG_CDP_VERSION 1793 CONFIG_CDP_VERSION
1799 1794
1800 An ascii string containing the version of the software. 1795 An ascii string containing the version of the software.
1801 1796
1802 CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM 1797 CONFIG_CDP_PLATFORM
1803 1798
1804 An ascii string containing the name of the platform. 1799 An ascii string containing the name of the platform.
1805 1800
1806 CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER 1801 CONFIG_CDP_TRIGGER
1807 1802
1808 A 32bit integer sent on the trigger. 1803 A 32bit integer sent on the trigger.
1809 1804
1810 CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION 1805 CONFIG_CDP_POWER_CONSUMPTION
1811 1806
1812 A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the 1807 A 16bit integer containing the power consumption of the
1813 device in .1 of milliwatts. 1808 device in .1 of milliwatts.
1814 1809
1815 CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE 1810 CONFIG_CDP_APPLIANCE_VLAN_TYPE
1816 1811
1817 A byte containing the id of the VLAN. 1812 A byte containing the id of the VLAN.
1818 1813
1819 - Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS 1814 - Status LED: CONFIG_LED_STATUS
1820 1815
1821 Several configurations allow to display the current 1816 Several configurations allow to display the current
1822 status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink 1817 status using a LED. For instance, the LED will blink
1823 fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as 1818 fast while running U-Boot code, stop blinking as
1824 soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and 1819 soon as a reply to a BOOTP request was received, and
1825 start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running 1820 start blinking slow once the Linux kernel is running
1826 (supported by a status LED driver in the Linux 1821 (supported by a status LED driver in the Linux
1827 kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this 1822 kernel). Defining CONFIG_LED_STATUS enables this
1828 feature in U-Boot. 1823 feature in U-Boot.
1829 1824
1830 Additional options: 1825 Additional options:
1831 1826
1832 CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO 1827 CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
1833 The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin. 1828 The status LED can be connected to a GPIO pin.
1834 In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a 1829 In such cases, the gpio_led driver can be used as a
1835 status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO 1830 status LED backend implementation. Define CONFIG_LED_STATUS_GPIO
1836 to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary. 1831 to include the gpio_led driver in the U-Boot binary.
1837 1832
1838 CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE 1833 CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE
1839 Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which 1834 Some GPIO connected LEDs may have inverted polarity in which
1840 case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and 1835 case the GPIO high value corresponds to LED off state and
1841 GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state. 1836 GPIO low value corresponds to LED on state.
1842 In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined 1837 In such cases CONFIG_GPIO_LED_INVERTED_TABLE may be defined
1843 with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity. 1838 with a list of GPIO LEDs that have inverted polarity.
1844 1839
1845 - I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C 1840 - I2C Support: CONFIG_SYS_I2C
1846 1841
1847 This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use 1842 This enable the NEW i2c subsystem, and will allow you to use
1848 i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set 1843 i2c commands at the u-boot command line (as long as you set
1849 CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c 1844 CONFIG_CMD_I2C in CONFIG_COMMANDS) and communicate with i2c
1850 based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See 1845 based realtime clock chips or other i2c devices. See
1851 common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line 1846 common/cmd_i2c.c for a description of the command line
1852 interface. 1847 interface.
1853 1848
1854 ported i2c driver to the new framework: 1849 ported i2c driver to the new framework:
1855 - drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c: 1850 - drivers/i2c/soft_i2c.c:
1856 - activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define 1851 - activate first bus with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT define
1857 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE 1852 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE
1858 for defining speed and slave address 1853 for defining speed and slave address
1859 - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define 1854 - activate second bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS2 define
1860 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2 1855 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_2 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_2
1861 for defining speed and slave address 1856 for defining speed and slave address
1862 - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define 1857 - activate third bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS3 define
1863 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3 1858 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_3 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_3
1864 for defining speed and slave address 1859 for defining speed and slave address
1865 - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define 1860 - activate fourth bus with I2C_SOFT_DECLARATIONS4 define
1866 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4 1861 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SPEED_4 and CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT_SLAVE_4
1867 for defining speed and slave address 1862 for defining speed and slave address
1868 1863
1869 - drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c: 1864 - drivers/i2c/fsl_i2c.c:
1870 - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL 1865 - activate i2c driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_FSL
1871 define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register 1866 define CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_OFFSET for setting the register
1872 offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and 1867 offset CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SPEED for the i2c speed and
1873 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first 1868 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C_SLAVE for the slave addr of the first
1874 bus. 1869 bus.
1875 - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define 1870 - If your board supports a second fsl i2c bus, define
1876 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset 1871 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_OFFSET for the register offset
1877 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and 1872 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SPEED for the speed and
1878 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the 1873 CONFIG_SYS_FSL_I2C2_SLAVE for the slave address of the
1879 second bus. 1874 second bus.
1880 1875
1881 - drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c: 1876 - drivers/i2c/tegra_i2c.c:
1882 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA 1877 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_TEGRA
1883 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from 1878 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses with a fix speed from
1884 100000 and the slave addr 0! 1879 100000 and the slave addr 0!
1885 1880
1886 - drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c 1881 - drivers/i2c/ppc4xx_i2c.c
1887 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX 1882 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX
1888 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 1883 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
1889 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 1884 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_PPC4XX_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
1890 1885
1891 - drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c 1886 - drivers/i2c/i2c_mxc.c
1892 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC 1887 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC
1893 - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1 1888 - enable bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C1
1894 - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2 1889 - enable bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C2
1895 - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3 1890 - enable bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C3
1896 - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4 1891 - enable bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MXC_I2C4
1897 - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED 1892 - define speed for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SPEED
1898 - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE 1893 - define slave for bus 1 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C1_SLAVE
1899 - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED 1894 - define speed for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SPEED
1900 - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE 1895 - define slave for bus 2 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C2_SLAVE
1901 - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED 1896 - define speed for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SPEED
1902 - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE 1897 - define slave for bus 3 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C3_SLAVE
1903 - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED 1898 - define speed for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SPEED
1904 - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE 1899 - define slave for bus 4 with CONFIG_SYS_MXC_I2C4_SLAVE
1905 If those defines are not set, default value is 100000 1900 If those defines are not set, default value is 100000
1906 for speed, and 0 for slave. 1901 for speed, and 0 for slave.
1907 1902
1908 - drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c: 1903 - drivers/i2c/rcar_i2c.c:
1909 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR 1904 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RCAR
1910 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses 1905 - This driver adds 4 i2c buses
1911 1906
1912 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0 1907 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_BASE for setting the register channel 0
1913 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0 1908 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C0_SPEED for for the speed channel 0
1914 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1 1909 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_BASE for setting the register channel 1
1915 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1 1910 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C1_SPEED for for the speed channel 1
1916 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2 1911 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_BASE for setting the register channel 2
1917 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2 1912 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C2_SPEED for for the speed channel 2
1918 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3 1913 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_BASE for setting the register channel 3
1919 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3 1914 - CONFIG_SYS_RCAR_I2C3_SPEED for for the speed channel 3
1920 - CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses 1915 - CONFIF_SYS_RCAR_I2C_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses
1921 1916
1922 - drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c: 1917 - drivers/i2c/sh_i2c.c:
1923 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH 1918 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH
1924 - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses 1919 - This driver adds from 2 to 5 i2c buses
1925 1920
1926 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0 1921 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE0 for setting the register channel 0
1927 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0 1922 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED0 for for the speed channel 0
1928 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1 1923 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE1 for setting the register channel 1
1929 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1 1924 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED1 for for the speed channel 1
1930 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2 1925 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE2 for setting the register channel 2
1931 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2 1926 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED2 for for the speed channel 2
1932 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3 1927 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE3 for setting the register channel 3
1933 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3 1928 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED3 for for the speed channel 3
1934 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4 1929 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_BASE4 for setting the register channel 4
1935 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4 1930 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_SPEED4 for for the speed channel 4
1936 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses 1931 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SH_NUM_CONTROLLERS for number of i2c buses
1937 1932
1938 - drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c 1933 - drivers/i2c/omap24xx_i2c.c
1939 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX 1934 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_OMAP24XX
1940 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0 1935 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED speed channel 0
1941 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0 1936 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE slave addr channel 0
1942 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1 1937 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED1 speed channel 1
1943 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1 1938 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE1 slave addr channel 1
1944 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2 1939 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED2 speed channel 2
1945 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2 1940 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE2 slave addr channel 2
1946 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3 1941 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED3 speed channel 3
1947 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3 1942 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE3 slave addr channel 3
1948 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4 1943 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SPEED4 speed channel 4
1949 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4 1944 - CONFIG_SYS_OMAP24_I2C_SLAVE4 slave addr channel 4
1950 1945
1951 - drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c 1946 - drivers/i2c/zynq_i2c.c
1952 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ 1947 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ
1953 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting 1948 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SPEED for speed setting
1954 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr 1949 - set CONFIG_SYS_I2C_ZYNQ_SLAVE for slave addr
1955 1950
1956 - drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c: 1951 - drivers/i2c/s3c24x0_i2c.c:
1957 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0 1952 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_S3C24X0
1958 - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420 1953 - This driver adds i2c buses (11 for Exynos5250, Exynos5420
1959 9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung) 1954 9 i2c buses for Exynos4 and 1 for S3C24X0 SoCs from Samsung)
1960 with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0! 1955 with a fix speed from 100000 and the slave addr 0!
1961 1956
1962 - drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c 1957 - drivers/i2c/ihs_i2c.c
1963 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS 1958 - activate this driver with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS
1964 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0 1959 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH0 activate hardware channel 0
1965 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0 1960 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0 speed channel 0
1966 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0 1961 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0 slave addr channel 0
1967 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1 1962 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH1 activate hardware channel 1
1968 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1 1963 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1 speed channel 1
1969 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1 1964 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1 slave addr channel 1
1970 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2 1965 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH2 activate hardware channel 2
1971 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2 1966 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2 speed channel 2
1972 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2 1967 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2 slave addr channel 2
1973 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3 1968 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_CH3 activate hardware channel 3
1974 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3 1969 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3 speed channel 3
1975 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3 1970 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3 slave addr channel 3
1976 - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL 1971 - activate dual channel with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_DUAL
1977 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1 1972 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_0_1 speed channel 0_1
1978 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1 1973 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_0_1 slave addr channel 0_1
1979 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1 1974 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_1_1 speed channel 1_1
1980 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1 1975 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_1_1 slave addr channel 1_1
1981 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1 1976 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_2_1 speed channel 2_1
1982 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1 1977 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_2_1 slave addr channel 2_1
1983 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1 1978 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SPEED_3_1 speed channel 3_1
1984 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1 1979 - CONFIG_SYS_I2C_IHS_SLAVE_3_1 slave addr channel 3_1
1985 1980
1986 additional defines: 1981 additional defines:
1987 1982
1988 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES 1983 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES
1989 Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use. 1984 Hold the number of i2c buses you want to use.
1990 1985
1991 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS 1986 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS
1992 define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware. 1987 define this, if you don't use i2c muxes on your hardware.
1993 if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can 1988 if CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS is not defined or == 0 you can
1994 omit this define. 1989 omit this define.
1995 1990
1996 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS 1991 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS
1997 define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected 1992 define how many muxes are maximal consecutively connected
1998 on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this 1993 on one i2c bus. If you not use i2c muxes, omit this
1999 define. 1994 define.
2000 1995
2001 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES 1996 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES
2002 hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if 1997 hold a list of buses you want to use, only used if
2003 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example 1998 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_DIRECT_BUS is not defined, for example
2004 a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and 1999 a board with CONFIG_SYS_I2C_MAX_HOPS = 1 and
2005 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9: 2000 CONFIG_SYS_NUM_I2C_BUSES = 9:
2006 2001
2007 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ 2002 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_BUSES {{0, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
2008 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \ 2003 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 1}}}, \
2009 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \ 2004 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 2}}}, \
2010 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \ 2005 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 3}}}, \
2011 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \ 2006 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 4}}}, \
2012 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \ 2007 {0, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9547, 0x70, 5}}}, \
2013 {1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \ 2008 {1, {I2C_NULL_HOP}}, \
2014 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \ 2009 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 1}}}, \
2015 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \ 2010 {1, {{I2C_MUX_PCA9544, 0x72, 2}}}, \
2016 } 2011 }
2017 2012
2018 which defines 2013 which defines
2019 bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux 2014 bus 0 on adapter 0 without a mux
2020 bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1 2015 bus 1 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 1
2021 bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2 2016 bus 2 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 2
2022 bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3 2017 bus 3 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 3
2023 bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4 2018 bus 4 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 4
2024 bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5 2019 bus 5 on adapter 0 with a PCA9547 on address 0x70 port 5
2025 bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux 2020 bus 6 on adapter 1 without a mux
2026 bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1 2021 bus 7 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 1
2027 bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2 2022 bus 8 on adapter 1 with a PCA9544 on address 0x72 port 2
2028 2023
2029 If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define. 2024 If you do not have i2c muxes on your board, omit this define.
2030 2025
2031 - Legacy I2C Support: 2026 - Legacy I2C Support:
2032 If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT) 2027 If you use the software i2c interface (CONFIG_SYS_I2C_SOFT)
2033 then the following macros need to be defined (examples are 2028 then the following macros need to be defined (examples are
2034 from include/configs/lwmon.h): 2029 from include/configs/lwmon.h):
2035 2030
2036 I2C_INIT 2031 I2C_INIT
2037 2032
2038 (Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C 2033 (Optional). Any commands necessary to enable the I2C
2039 controller or configure ports. 2034 controller or configure ports.
2040 2035
2041 eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL) 2036 eg: #define I2C_INIT (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SCL)
2042 2037
2043 I2C_ACTIVE 2038 I2C_ACTIVE
2044 2039
2045 The code necessary to make the I2C data line active 2040 The code necessary to make the I2C data line active
2046 (driven). If the data line is open collector, this 2041 (driven). If the data line is open collector, this
2047 define can be null. 2042 define can be null.
2048 2043
2049 eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA) 2044 eg: #define I2C_ACTIVE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir |= PB_SDA)
2050 2045
2051 I2C_TRISTATE 2046 I2C_TRISTATE
2052 2047
2053 The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated 2048 The code necessary to make the I2C data line tri-stated
2054 (inactive). If the data line is open collector, this 2049 (inactive). If the data line is open collector, this
2055 define can be null. 2050 define can be null.
2056 2051
2057 eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA) 2052 eg: #define I2C_TRISTATE (immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdir &= ~PB_SDA)
2058 2053
2059 I2C_READ 2054 I2C_READ
2060 2055
2061 Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high, 2056 Code that returns true if the I2C data line is high,
2062 false if it is low. 2057 false if it is low.
2063 2058
2064 eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0) 2059 eg: #define I2C_READ ((immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat & PB_SDA) != 0)
2065 2060
2066 I2C_SDA(bit) 2061 I2C_SDA(bit)
2067 2062
2068 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it 2063 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C data line high. If it
2069 is false, it clears it (low). 2064 is false, it clears it (low).
2070 2065
2071 eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \ 2066 eg: #define I2C_SDA(bit) \
2072 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \ 2067 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SDA; \
2073 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA 2068 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SDA
2074 2069
2075 I2C_SCL(bit) 2070 I2C_SCL(bit)
2076 2071
2077 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it 2072 If <bit> is true, sets the I2C clock line high. If it
2078 is false, it clears it (low). 2073 is false, it clears it (low).
2079 2074
2080 eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \ 2075 eg: #define I2C_SCL(bit) \
2081 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \ 2076 if(bit) immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat |= PB_SCL; \
2082 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL 2077 else immr->im_cpm.cp_pbdat &= ~PB_SCL
2083 2078
2084 I2C_DELAY 2079 I2C_DELAY
2085 2080
2086 This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this 2081 This delay is invoked four times per clock cycle so this
2087 controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus 2082 controls the rate of data transfer. The data rate thus
2088 is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something 2083 is 1 / (I2C_DELAY * 4). Often defined to be something
2089 like: 2084 like:
2090 2085
2091 #define I2C_DELAY udelay(2) 2086 #define I2C_DELAY udelay(2)
2092 2087
2093 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA 2088 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SCL / CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_GPIO_SDA
2094 2089
2095 If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h), 2090 If your arch supports the generic GPIO framework (asm/gpio.h),
2096 then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be 2091 then you may alternatively define the two GPIOs that are to be
2097 used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will 2092 used as SCL / SDA. Any of the previous I2C_xxx macros will
2098 have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate. 2093 have GPIO-based defaults assigned to them as appropriate.
2099 2094
2100 You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to 2095 You should define these to the GPIO value as given directly to
2101 the generic GPIO functions. 2096 the generic GPIO functions.
2102 2097
2103 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD 2098 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_INIT_BOARD
2104 2099
2105 When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer 2100 When a board is reset during an i2c bus transfer
2106 chips might think that the current transfer is still 2101 chips might think that the current transfer is still
2107 in progress. On some boards it is possible to access 2102 in progress. On some boards it is possible to access
2108 the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the 2103 the i2c SCLK line directly, either by using the
2109 processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin 2104 processor pin as a GPIO or by having a second pin
2110 connected to the bus. If this option is defined a 2105 connected to the bus. If this option is defined a
2111 custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c 2106 custom i2c_init_board() routine in boards/xxx/board.c
2112 is run early in the boot sequence. 2107 is run early in the boot sequence.
2113 2108
2114 CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 2109 CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
2115 2110
2116 This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which 2111 This option allows the use of multiple I2C buses, each of which
2117 must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is 2112 must have a controller. At any point in time, only one bus is
2118 active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command. 2113 active. To switch to a different bus, use the 'i2c dev' command.
2119 Note that bus numbering is zero-based. 2114 Note that bus numbering is zero-based.
2120 2115
2121 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES 2116 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES
2122 2117
2123 This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped 2118 This option specifies a list of I2C devices that will be skipped
2124 when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 2119 when the 'i2c probe' command is issued. If CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
2125 is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify 2120 is set, specify a list of bus-device pairs. Otherwise, specify
2126 a 1D array of device addresses 2121 a 1D array of device addresses
2127 2122
2128 e.g. 2123 e.g.
2129 #undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 2124 #undef CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
2130 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68} 2125 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {0x50,0x68}
2131 2126
2132 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus 2127 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on a board with one I2C bus
2133 2128
2134 #define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS 2129 #define CONFIG_I2C_MULTI_BUS
2135 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}} 2130 #define CONFIG_SYS_I2C_NOPROBES {{0,0x50},{0,0x68},{1,0x54}}
2136 2131
2137 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1 2132 will skip addresses 0x50 and 0x68 on bus 0 and address 0x54 on bus 1
2138 2133
2139 CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM 2134 CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
2140 2135
2141 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD. 2136 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for DDR SPD.
2142 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0. 2137 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that SPD is on I2C bus 0.
2143 2138
2144 CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM 2139 CONFIG_SYS_RTC_BUS_NUM
2145 2140
2146 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC. 2141 If defined, then this indicates the I2C bus number for the RTC.
2147 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0. 2142 If not defined, then U-Boot assumes that RTC is on I2C bus 0.
2148 2143
2149 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START 2144 CONFIG_SOFT_I2C_READ_REPEATED_START
2150 2145
2151 defining this will force the i2c_read() function in 2146 defining this will force the i2c_read() function in
2152 the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start 2147 the soft_i2c driver to perform an I2C repeated start
2153 between writing the address pointer and reading the 2148 between writing the address pointer and reading the
2154 data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour 2149 data. If this define is omitted the default behaviour
2155 of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C 2150 of doing a stop-start sequence will be used. Most I2C
2156 devices can use either method, but some require one or 2151 devices can use either method, but some require one or
2157 the other. 2152 the other.
2158 2153
2159 - SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI 2154 - SPI Support: CONFIG_SPI
2160 2155
2161 Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with 2156 Enables SPI driver (so far only tested with
2162 SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and 2157 SPI EEPROM, also an instance works with Crystal A/D and
2163 D/As on the SACSng board) 2158 D/As on the SACSng board)
2164 2159
2165 CONFIG_SH_SPI 2160 CONFIG_SH_SPI
2166 2161
2167 Enables the driver for SPI controller on SuperH. Currently 2162 Enables the driver for SPI controller on SuperH. Currently
2168 only SH7757 is supported. 2163 only SH7757 is supported.
2169 2164
2170 CONFIG_SOFT_SPI 2165 CONFIG_SOFT_SPI
2171 2166
2172 Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than 2167 Enables a software (bit-bang) SPI driver rather than
2173 using hardware support. This is a general purpose 2168 using hardware support. This is a general purpose
2174 driver that only requires three general I/O port pins 2169 driver that only requires three general I/O port pins
2175 (two outputs, one input) to function. If this is 2170 (two outputs, one input) to function. If this is
2176 defined, the board configuration must define several 2171 defined, the board configuration must define several
2177 SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For 2172 SPI configuration items (port pins to use, etc). For
2178 an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h. 2173 an example, see include/configs/sacsng.h.
2179 2174
2180 CONFIG_HARD_SPI 2175 CONFIG_HARD_SPI
2181 2176
2182 Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads 2177 Enables a hardware SPI driver for general-purpose reads
2183 and writes. As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration 2178 and writes. As with CONFIG_SOFT_SPI, the board configuration
2184 must define a list of chip-select function pointers. 2179 must define a list of chip-select function pointers.
2185 Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors. For an 2180 Currently supported on some MPC8xxx processors. For an
2186 example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h. 2181 example, see include/configs/mpc8349emds.h.
2187 2182
2188 CONFIG_MXC_SPI 2183 CONFIG_MXC_SPI
2189 2184
2190 Enables the driver for the SPI controllers on i.MX and MXC 2185 Enables the driver for the SPI controllers on i.MX and MXC
2191 SoCs. Currently i.MX31/35/51 are supported. 2186 SoCs. Currently i.MX31/35/51 are supported.
2192 2187
2193 CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT 2188 CONFIG_SYS_SPI_MXC_WAIT
2194 Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed. 2189 Timeout for waiting until spi transfer completed.
2195 default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */ 2190 default: (CONFIG_SYS_HZ/100) /* 10 ms */
2196 2191
2197 - FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA 2192 - FPGA Support: CONFIG_FPGA
2198 2193
2199 Enables FPGA subsystem. 2194 Enables FPGA subsystem.
2200 2195
2201 CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor> 2196 CONFIG_FPGA_<vendor>
2202 2197
2203 Enables support for specific chip vendors. 2198 Enables support for specific chip vendors.
2204 (ALTERA, XILINX) 2199 (ALTERA, XILINX)
2205 2200
2206 CONFIG_FPGA_<family> 2201 CONFIG_FPGA_<family>
2207 2202
2208 Enables support for FPGA family. 2203 Enables support for FPGA family.
2209 (SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX) 2204 (SPARTAN2, SPARTAN3, VIRTEX2, CYCLONE2, ACEX1K, ACEX)
2210 2205
2211 CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT 2206 CONFIG_FPGA_COUNT
2212 2207
2213 Specify the number of FPGA devices to support. 2208 Specify the number of FPGA devices to support.
2214 2209
2215 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK 2210 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_PROG_FEEDBACK
2216 2211
2217 Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration. 2212 Enable printing of hash marks during FPGA configuration.
2218 2213
2219 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY 2214 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_BUSY
2220 2215
2221 Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy 2216 Enable checks on FPGA configuration interface busy
2222 status by the configuration function. This option 2217 status by the configuration function. This option
2223 will require a board or device specific function to 2218 will require a board or device specific function to
2224 be written. 2219 be written.
2225 2220
2226 CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY 2221 CONFIG_FPGA_DELAY
2227 2222
2228 If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA 2223 If defined, a function that provides delays in the FPGA
2229 configuration driver. 2224 configuration driver.
2230 2225
2231 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC 2226 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_CTRLC
2232 Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration 2227 Allow Control-C to interrupt FPGA configuration
2233 2228
2234 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR 2229 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_CHECK_ERROR
2235 2230
2236 Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile 2231 Check for configuration errors during FPGA bitfile
2237 loading. For example, abort during Virtex II 2232 loading. For example, abort during Virtex II
2238 configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which 2233 configuration if the INIT_B line goes low (which
2239 indicated a CRC error). 2234 indicated a CRC error).
2240 2235
2241 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT 2236 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_INIT
2242 2237
2243 Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert 2238 Maximum time to wait for the INIT_B line to de-assert
2244 after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II 2239 after PROB_B has been de-asserted during a Virtex II
2245 FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500 2240 FPGA configuration sequence. The default time is 500
2246 ms. 2241 ms.
2247 2242
2248 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY 2243 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_BUSY
2249 2244
2250 Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during 2245 Maximum time to wait for BUSY to de-assert during
2251 Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms. 2246 Virtex II FPGA configuration. The default is 5 ms.
2252 2247
2253 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG 2248 CONFIG_SYS_FPGA_WAIT_CONFIG
2254 2249
2255 Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is 2250 Time to wait after FPGA configuration. The default is
2256 200 ms. 2251 200 ms.
2257 2252
2258 - Configuration Management: 2253 - Configuration Management:
2259 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET 2254 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET
2260 2255
2261 Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary 2256 Some SoCs need special image types (e.g. U-Boot binary
2262 with a special header) as build targets. By defining 2257 with a special header) as build targets. By defining
2263 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this 2258 CONFIG_BUILD_TARGET in the SoC / board header, this
2264 special image will be automatically built upon calling 2259 special image will be automatically built upon calling
2265 make / buildman. 2260 make / buildman.
2266 2261
2267 CONFIG_IDENT_STRING 2262 CONFIG_IDENT_STRING
2268 2263
2269 If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot 2264 If defined, this string will be added to the U-Boot
2270 version information (U_BOOT_VERSION) 2265 version information (U_BOOT_VERSION)
2271 2266
2272 - Vendor Parameter Protection: 2267 - Vendor Parameter Protection:
2273 2268
2274 U-Boot considers the values of the environment 2269 U-Boot considers the values of the environment
2275 variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and 2270 variables "serial#" (Board Serial Number) and
2276 "ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that 2271 "ethaddr" (Ethernet Address) to be parameters that
2277 are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and 2272 are set once by the board vendor / manufacturer, and
2278 protects these variables from casual modification by 2273 protects these variables from casual modification by
2279 the user. Once set, these variables are read-only, 2274 the user. Once set, these variables are read-only,
2280 and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can 2275 and write or delete attempts are rejected. You can
2281 change this behaviour: 2276 change this behaviour:
2282 2277
2283 If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config 2278 If CONFIG_ENV_OVERWRITE is #defined in your config
2284 file, the write protection for vendor parameters is 2279 file, the write protection for vendor parameters is
2285 completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete 2280 completely disabled. Anybody can change or delete
2286 these parameters. 2281 these parameters.
2287 2282
2288 Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the 2283 Alternatively, if you define _both_ an ethaddr in the
2289 default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default 2284 default env _and_ CONFIG_OVERWRITE_ETHADDR_ONCE, a default
2290 Ethernet address is installed in the environment, 2285 Ethernet address is installed in the environment,
2291 which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The 2286 which can be changed exactly ONCE by the user. [The
2292 serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains 2287 serial# is unaffected by this, i. e. it remains
2293 read-only.] 2288 read-only.]
2294 2289
2295 The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way 2290 The same can be accomplished in a more flexible way
2296 for any variable by configuring the type of access 2291 for any variable by configuring the type of access
2297 to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable 2292 to allow for those variables in the ".flags" variable
2298 or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC. 2293 or define CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC.
2299 2294
2300 - Protected RAM: 2295 - Protected RAM:
2301 CONFIG_PRAM 2296 CONFIG_PRAM
2302 2297
2303 Define this variable to enable the reservation of 2298 Define this variable to enable the reservation of
2304 "protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten 2299 "protected RAM", i. e. RAM which is not overwritten
2305 by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of 2300 by U-Boot. Define CONFIG_PRAM to hold the number of
2306 kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite 2301 kB you want to reserve for pRAM. You can overwrite
2307 this default value by defining an environment 2302 this default value by defining an environment
2308 variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to 2303 variable "pram" to the number of kB you want to
2309 reserve. Note that the board info structure will 2304 reserve. Note that the board info structure will
2310 still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is 2305 still show the full amount of RAM. If pRAM is
2311 reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will 2306 reserved, a new environment variable "mem" will
2312 automatically be defined to hold the amount of 2307 automatically be defined to hold the amount of
2313 remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot 2308 remaining RAM in a form that can be passed as boot
2314 argument to Linux, for instance like that: 2309 argument to Linux, for instance like that:
2315 2310
2316 setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem} 2311 setenv bootargs ... mem=\${mem}
2317 saveenv 2312 saveenv
2318 2313
2319 This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory, 2314 This way you can tell Linux not to use this memory,
2320 either, which results in a memory region that will 2315 either, which results in a memory region that will
2321 not be affected by reboots. 2316 not be affected by reboots.
2322 2317
2323 *WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic 2318 *WARNING* If your board configuration uses automatic
2324 detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that 2319 detection of the RAM size, you must make sure that
2325 this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the 2320 this memory test is non-destructive. So far, the
2326 following board configurations are known to be 2321 following board configurations are known to be
2327 "pRAM-clean": 2322 "pRAM-clean":
2328 2323
2329 IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx, 2324 IVMS8, IVML24, SPD8xx,
2330 HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON, 2325 HERMES, IP860, RPXlite, LWMON,
2331 FLAGADM 2326 FLAGADM
2332 2327
2333 - Access to physical memory region (> 4GB) 2328 - Access to physical memory region (> 4GB)
2334 Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not 2329 Some basic support is provided for operations on memory not
2335 normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures 2330 normally accessible to U-Boot - e.g. some architectures
2336 support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit 2331 support access to more than 4GB of memory on 32-bit
2337 machines using physical address extension or similar. 2332 machines using physical address extension or similar.
2338 Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which 2333 Define CONFIG_PHYSMEM to access this basic support, which
2339 currently only supports clearing the memory. 2334 currently only supports clearing the memory.
2340 2335
2341 - Error Recovery: 2336 - Error Recovery:
2342 CONFIG_PANIC_HANG 2337 CONFIG_PANIC_HANG
2343 2338
2344 Define this variable to stop the system in case of a 2339 Define this variable to stop the system in case of a
2345 fatal error, so that you have to reset it manually. 2340 fatal error, so that you have to reset it manually.
2346 This is probably NOT a good idea for an embedded 2341 This is probably NOT a good idea for an embedded
2347 system where you want the system to reboot 2342 system where you want the system to reboot
2348 automatically as fast as possible, but it may be 2343 automatically as fast as possible, but it may be
2349 useful during development since you can try to debug 2344 useful during development since you can try to debug
2350 the conditions that lead to the situation. 2345 the conditions that lead to the situation.
2351 2346
2352 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT 2347 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT
2353 2348
2354 This variable defines the number of retries for 2349 This variable defines the number of retries for
2355 network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP 2350 network operations like ARP, RARP, TFTP, or BOOTP
2356 before giving up the operation. If not defined, a 2351 before giving up the operation. If not defined, a
2357 default value of 5 is used. 2352 default value of 5 is used.
2358 2353
2359 CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT 2354 CONFIG_ARP_TIMEOUT
2360 2355
2361 Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds. 2356 Timeout waiting for an ARP reply in milliseconds.
2362 2357
2363 CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 2358 CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT
2364 2359
2365 Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol. 2360 Timeout in milliseconds used in NFS protocol.
2366 If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command, 2361 If you encounter "ERROR: Cannot umount" in nfs command,
2367 try longer timeout such as 2362 try longer timeout such as
2368 #define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL 2363 #define CONFIG_NFS_TIMEOUT 10000UL
2369 2364
2370 - Command Interpreter: 2365 - Command Interpreter:
2371 CONFIG_AUTO_COMPLETE 2366 CONFIG_AUTO_COMPLETE
2372 2367
2373 Enable auto completion of commands using TAB. 2368 Enable auto completion of commands using TAB.
2374 2369
2375 CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2 2370 CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT_HUSH_PS2
2376 2371
2377 This defines the secondary prompt string, which is 2372 This defines the secondary prompt string, which is
2378 printed when the command interpreter needs more input 2373 printed when the command interpreter needs more input
2379 to complete a command. Usually "> ". 2374 to complete a command. Usually "> ".
2380 2375
2381 Note: 2376 Note:
2382 2377
2383 In the current implementation, the local variables 2378 In the current implementation, the local variables
2384 space and global environment variables space are 2379 space and global environment variables space are
2385 separated. Local variables are those you define by 2380 separated. Local variables are those you define by
2386 simply typing `name=value'. To access a local 2381 simply typing `name=value'. To access a local
2387 variable later on, you have write `$name' or 2382 variable later on, you have write `$name' or
2388 `${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable 2383 `${name}'; to execute the contents of a variable
2389 directly type `$name' at the command prompt. 2384 directly type `$name' at the command prompt.
2390 2385
2391 Global environment variables are those you use 2386 Global environment variables are those you use
2392 setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored 2387 setenv/printenv to work with. To run a command stored
2393 in such a variable, you need to use the run command, 2388 in such a variable, you need to use the run command,
2394 and you must not use the '$' sign to access them. 2389 and you must not use the '$' sign to access them.
2395 2390
2396 To store commands and special characters in a 2391 To store commands and special characters in a
2397 variable, please use double quotation marks 2392 variable, please use double quotation marks
2398 surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead 2393 surrounding the whole text of the variable, instead
2399 of the backslashes before semicolons and special 2394 of the backslashes before semicolons and special
2400 symbols. 2395 symbols.
2401 2396
2402 - Command Line Editing and History: 2397 - Command Line Editing and History:
2403 CONFIG_CMDLINE_EDITING 2398 CONFIG_CMDLINE_EDITING
2404 2399
2405 Enable editing and History functions for interactive 2400 Enable editing and History functions for interactive
2406 command line input operations 2401 command line input operations
2407 2402
2408 - Command Line PS1/PS2 support: 2403 - Command Line PS1/PS2 support:
2409 CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT 2404 CONFIG_CMDLINE_PS_SUPPORT
2410 2405
2411 Enable support for changing the command prompt string 2406 Enable support for changing the command prompt string
2412 at run-time. Only static string is supported so far. 2407 at run-time. Only static string is supported so far.
2413 The string is obtained from environment variables PS1 2408 The string is obtained from environment variables PS1
2414 and PS2. 2409 and PS2.
2415 2410
2416 - Default Environment: 2411 - Default Environment:
2417 CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS 2412 CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS
2418 2413
2419 Define this to contain any number of null terminated 2414 Define this to contain any number of null terminated
2420 strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of 2415 strings (variable = value pairs) that will be part of
2421 the default environment compiled into the boot image. 2416 the default environment compiled into the boot image.
2422 2417
2423 For example, place something like this in your 2418 For example, place something like this in your
2424 board's config file: 2419 board's config file:
2425 2420
2426 #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \ 2421 #define CONFIG_EXTRA_ENV_SETTINGS \
2427 "myvar1=value1\0" \ 2422 "myvar1=value1\0" \
2428 "myvar2=value2\0" 2423 "myvar2=value2\0"
2429 2424
2430 Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the 2425 Warning: This method is based on knowledge about the
2431 internal format how the environment is stored by the 2426 internal format how the environment is stored by the
2432 U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported 2427 U-Boot code. This is NOT an official, exported
2433 interface! Although it is unlikely that this format 2428 interface! Although it is unlikely that this format
2434 will change soon, there is no guarantee either. 2429 will change soon, there is no guarantee either.
2435 You better know what you are doing here. 2430 You better know what you are doing here.
2436 2431
2437 Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is 2432 Note: overly (ab)use of the default environment is
2438 discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset 2433 discouraged. Make sure to check other ways to preset
2439 the environment like the "source" command or the 2434 the environment like the "source" command or the
2440 boot command first. 2435 boot command first.
2441 2436
2442 CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_CONFIG 2437 CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_CONFIG
2443 2438
2444 Define this in order to add variables describing the 2439 Define this in order to add variables describing the
2445 U-Boot build configuration to the default environment. 2440 U-Boot build configuration to the default environment.
2446 These will be named arch, cpu, board, vendor, and soc. 2441 These will be named arch, cpu, board, vendor, and soc.
2447 2442
2448 Enabling this option will cause the following to be defined: 2443 Enabling this option will cause the following to be defined:
2449 2444
2450 - CONFIG_SYS_ARCH 2445 - CONFIG_SYS_ARCH
2451 - CONFIG_SYS_CPU 2446 - CONFIG_SYS_CPU
2452 - CONFIG_SYS_BOARD 2447 - CONFIG_SYS_BOARD
2453 - CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR 2448 - CONFIG_SYS_VENDOR
2454 - CONFIG_SYS_SOC 2449 - CONFIG_SYS_SOC
2455 2450
2456 CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG 2451 CONFIG_ENV_VARS_UBOOT_RUNTIME_CONFIG
2457 2452
2458 Define this in order to add variables describing certain 2453 Define this in order to add variables describing certain
2459 run-time determined information about the hardware to the 2454 run-time determined information about the hardware to the
2460 environment. These will be named board_name, board_rev. 2455 environment. These will be named board_name, board_rev.
2461 2456
2462 CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT 2457 CONFIG_DELAY_ENVIRONMENT
2463 2458
2464 Normally the environment is loaded when the board is 2459 Normally the environment is loaded when the board is
2465 initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits 2460 initialised so that it is available to U-Boot. This inhibits
2466 that so that the environment is not available until 2461 that so that the environment is not available until
2467 explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL 2462 explicitly loaded later by U-Boot code. With CONFIG_OF_CONTROL
2468 this is instead controlled by the value of 2463 this is instead controlled by the value of
2469 /config/load-environment. 2464 /config/load-environment.
2470 2465
2471 - DataFlash Support: 2466 - DataFlash Support:
2472 CONFIG_HAS_DATAFLASH 2467 CONFIG_HAS_DATAFLASH
2473 2468
2474 Defining this option enables DataFlash features and 2469 Defining this option enables DataFlash features and
2475 allows to read/write in Dataflash via the standard 2470 allows to read/write in Dataflash via the standard
2476 commands cp, md... 2471 commands cp, md...
2477 2472
2478 - Serial Flash support 2473 - Serial Flash support
2479 CONFIG_CMD_SF 2474 CONFIG_CMD_SF
2480 2475
2481 Defining this option enables SPI flash commands 2476 Defining this option enables SPI flash commands
2482 'sf probe/read/write/erase/update'. 2477 'sf probe/read/write/erase/update'.
2483 2478
2484 Usage requires an initial 'probe' to define the serial 2479 Usage requires an initial 'probe' to define the serial
2485 flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update 2480 flash parameters, followed by read/write/erase/update
2486 commands. 2481 commands.
2487 2482
2488 The following defaults may be provided by the platform 2483 The following defaults may be provided by the platform
2489 to handle the common case when only a single serial 2484 to handle the common case when only a single serial
2490 flash is present on the system. 2485 flash is present on the system.
2491 2486
2492 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS Bus identifier 2487 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_BUS Bus identifier
2493 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS Chip-select 2488 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_CS Chip-select
2494 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE (see include/spi.h) 2489 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_MODE (see include/spi.h)
2495 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED in Hz 2490 CONFIG_SF_DEFAULT_SPEED in Hz
2496 2491
2497 CONFIG_SYSTEMACE 2492 CONFIG_SYSTEMACE
2498 2493
2499 Adding this option adds support for Xilinx SystemACE 2494 Adding this option adds support for Xilinx SystemACE
2500 chips attached via some sort of local bus. The address 2495 chips attached via some sort of local bus. The address
2501 of the chip must also be defined in the 2496 of the chip must also be defined in the
2502 CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE macro. For example: 2497 CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE macro. For example:
2503 2498
2504 #define CONFIG_SYSTEMACE 2499 #define CONFIG_SYSTEMACE
2505 #define CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE 0xf0000000 2500 #define CONFIG_SYS_SYSTEMACE_BASE 0xf0000000
2506 2501
2507 When SystemACE support is added, the "ace" device type 2502 When SystemACE support is added, the "ace" device type
2508 becomes available to the fat commands, i.e. fatls. 2503 becomes available to the fat commands, i.e. fatls.
2509 2504
2510 - TFTP Fixed UDP Port: 2505 - TFTP Fixed UDP Port:
2511 CONFIG_TFTP_PORT 2506 CONFIG_TFTP_PORT
2512 2507
2513 If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp 2508 If this is defined, the environment variable tftpsrcp
2514 is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value. 2509 is used to supply the TFTP UDP source port value.
2515 If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port 2510 If tftpsrcp isn't defined, the normal pseudo-random port
2516 number generator is used. 2511 number generator is used.
2517 2512
2518 Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply 2513 Also, the environment variable tftpdstp is used to supply
2519 the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't 2514 the TFTP UDP destination port value. If tftpdstp isn't
2520 defined, the normal port 69 is used. 2515 defined, the normal port 69 is used.
2521 2516
2522 The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to 2517 The purpose for tftpsrcp is to allow a TFTP server to
2523 blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured 2518 blindly start the TFTP transfer using the pre-configured
2524 target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of 2519 target IP address and UDP port. This has the effect of
2525 "punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing 2520 "punching through" the (Windows XP) firewall, allowing
2526 the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally. 2521 the remainder of the TFTP transfer to proceed normally.
2527 A better solution is to properly configure the firewall, 2522 A better solution is to properly configure the firewall,
2528 but sometimes that is not allowed. 2523 but sometimes that is not allowed.
2529 2524
2530 - bootcount support: 2525 - bootcount support:
2531 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT 2526 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_LIMIT
2532 2527
2533 This enables the bootcounter support, see: 2528 This enables the bootcounter support, see:
2534 http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit 2529 http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/UBootBootCountLimit
2535 2530
2536 CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE 2531 CONFIG_AT91SAM9XE
2537 enable special bootcounter support on at91sam9xe based boards. 2532 enable special bootcounter support on at91sam9xe based boards.
2538 CONFIG_SOC_DA8XX 2533 CONFIG_SOC_DA8XX
2539 enable special bootcounter support on da850 based boards. 2534 enable special bootcounter support on da850 based boards.
2540 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM 2535 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_RAM
2541 enable support for the bootcounter in RAM 2536 enable support for the bootcounter in RAM
2542 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C 2537 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_I2C
2543 enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device. 2538 enable support for the bootcounter on an i2c (like RTC) device.
2544 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address 2539 CONFIG_SYS_I2C_RTC_ADDR = i2c chip address
2545 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for 2540 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTCOUNT_ADDR = i2c addr which is used for
2546 the bootcounter. 2541 the bootcounter.
2547 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len 2542 CONFIG_BOOTCOUNT_ALEN = address len
2548 2543
2549 - Show boot progress: 2544 - Show boot progress:
2550 CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS 2545 CONFIG_SHOW_BOOT_PROGRESS
2551 2546
2552 Defining this option allows to add some board- 2547 Defining this option allows to add some board-
2553 specific code (calling a user-provided function 2548 specific code (calling a user-provided function
2554 "show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show 2549 "show_boot_progress(int)") that enables you to show
2555 the system's boot progress on some display (for 2550 the system's boot progress on some display (for
2556 example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment, 2551 example, some LED's) on your board. At the moment,
2557 the following checkpoints are implemented: 2552 the following checkpoints are implemented:
2558 2553
2559 2554
2560 Legacy uImage format: 2555 Legacy uImage format:
2561 2556
2562 Arg Where When 2557 Arg Where When
2563 1 common/cmd_bootm.c before attempting to boot an image 2558 1 common/cmd_bootm.c before attempting to boot an image
2564 -1 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad magic number 2559 -1 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad magic number
2565 2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct magic number 2560 2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct magic number
2566 -2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad checksum 2561 -2 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has bad checksum
2567 3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct checksum 2562 3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image header has correct checksum
2568 -3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has bad checksum 2563 -3 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has bad checksum
2569 4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has correct checksum 2564 4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image data has correct checksum
2570 -4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image is for unsupported architecture 2565 -4 common/cmd_bootm.c Image is for unsupported architecture
2571 5 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK 2566 5 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK
2572 -5 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi) 2567 -5 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong Image Type (not kernel, multi)
2573 6 common/cmd_bootm.c Image Type check OK 2568 6 common/cmd_bootm.c Image Type check OK
2574 -6 common/cmd_bootm.c gunzip uncompression error 2569 -6 common/cmd_bootm.c gunzip uncompression error
2575 -7 common/cmd_bootm.c Unimplemented compression type 2570 -7 common/cmd_bootm.c Unimplemented compression type
2576 7 common/cmd_bootm.c Uncompression OK 2571 7 common/cmd_bootm.c Uncompression OK
2577 8 common/cmd_bootm.c No uncompress/copy overwrite error 2572 8 common/cmd_bootm.c No uncompress/copy overwrite error
2578 -9 common/cmd_bootm.c Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX) 2573 -9 common/cmd_bootm.c Unsupported OS (not Linux, BSD, VxWorks, QNX)
2579 2574
2580 9 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification 2575 9 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification
2581 -10 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad magic number 2576 -10 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad magic number
2582 -11 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad checksum 2577 -11 common/image.c Ramdisk header has bad checksum
2583 10 common/image.c Ramdisk header is OK 2578 10 common/image.c Ramdisk header is OK
2584 -12 common/image.c Ramdisk data has bad checksum 2579 -12 common/image.c Ramdisk data has bad checksum
2585 11 common/image.c Ramdisk data has correct checksum 2580 11 common/image.c Ramdisk data has correct checksum
2586 12 common/image.c Ramdisk verification complete, start loading 2581 12 common/image.c Ramdisk verification complete, start loading
2587 -13 common/image.c Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk) 2582 -13 common/image.c Wrong Image Type (not PPC Linux ramdisk)
2588 13 common/image.c Start multifile image verification 2583 13 common/image.c Start multifile image verification
2589 14 common/image.c No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue. 2584 14 common/image.c No initial ramdisk, no multifile, continue.
2590 2585
2591 15 arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS 2586 15 arch/<arch>/lib/bootm.c All preparation done, transferring control to OS
2592 2587
2593 -30 arch/powerpc/lib/board.c Fatal error, hang the system 2588 -30 arch/powerpc/lib/board.c Fatal error, hang the system
2594 -31 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog() 2589 -31 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_output_backlog()
2595 -32 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_run_single() 2590 -32 post/post.c POST test failed, detected by post_run_single()
2596 2591
2597 34 common/cmd_doc.c before loading a Image from a DOC device 2592 34 common/cmd_doc.c before loading a Image from a DOC device
2598 -35 common/cmd_doc.c Bad usage of "doc" command 2593 -35 common/cmd_doc.c Bad usage of "doc" command
2599 35 common/cmd_doc.c correct usage of "doc" command 2594 35 common/cmd_doc.c correct usage of "doc" command
2600 -36 common/cmd_doc.c No boot device 2595 -36 common/cmd_doc.c No boot device
2601 36 common/cmd_doc.c correct boot device 2596 36 common/cmd_doc.c correct boot device
2602 -37 common/cmd_doc.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device 2597 -37 common/cmd_doc.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device
2603 37 common/cmd_doc.c correct chip ID found, device available 2598 37 common/cmd_doc.c correct chip ID found, device available
2604 -38 common/cmd_doc.c Read Error on boot device 2599 -38 common/cmd_doc.c Read Error on boot device
2605 38 common/cmd_doc.c reading Image header from DOC device OK 2600 38 common/cmd_doc.c reading Image header from DOC device OK
2606 -39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has bad magic number 2601 -39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has bad magic number
2607 39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number 2602 39 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number
2608 -40 common/cmd_doc.c Error reading Image from DOC device 2603 -40 common/cmd_doc.c Error reading Image from DOC device
2609 40 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number 2604 40 common/cmd_doc.c Image header has correct magic number
2610 41 common/cmd_ide.c before loading a Image from a IDE device 2605 41 common/cmd_ide.c before loading a Image from a IDE device
2611 -42 common/cmd_ide.c Bad usage of "ide" command 2606 -42 common/cmd_ide.c Bad usage of "ide" command
2612 42 common/cmd_ide.c correct usage of "ide" command 2607 42 common/cmd_ide.c correct usage of "ide" command
2613 -43 common/cmd_ide.c No boot device 2608 -43 common/cmd_ide.c No boot device
2614 43 common/cmd_ide.c boot device found 2609 43 common/cmd_ide.c boot device found
2615 -44 common/cmd_ide.c Device not available 2610 -44 common/cmd_ide.c Device not available
2616 44 common/cmd_ide.c Device available 2611 44 common/cmd_ide.c Device available
2617 -45 common/cmd_ide.c wrong partition selected 2612 -45 common/cmd_ide.c wrong partition selected
2618 45 common/cmd_ide.c partition selected 2613 45 common/cmd_ide.c partition selected
2619 -46 common/cmd_ide.c Unknown partition table 2614 -46 common/cmd_ide.c Unknown partition table
2620 46 common/cmd_ide.c valid partition table found 2615 46 common/cmd_ide.c valid partition table found
2621 -47 common/cmd_ide.c Invalid partition type 2616 -47 common/cmd_ide.c Invalid partition type
2622 47 common/cmd_ide.c correct partition type 2617 47 common/cmd_ide.c correct partition type
2623 -48 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image Header on boot device 2618 -48 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image Header on boot device
2624 48 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image Header from IDE device OK 2619 48 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image Header from IDE device OK
2625 -49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad magic number 2620 -49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad magic number
2626 49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct magic number 2621 49 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct magic number
2627 -50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad checksum 2622 -50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has bad checksum
2628 50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct checksum 2623 50 common/cmd_ide.c Image header has correct checksum
2629 -51 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image from IDE device 2624 -51 common/cmd_ide.c Error reading Image from IDE device
2630 51 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image from IDE device OK 2625 51 common/cmd_ide.c reading Image from IDE device OK
2631 52 common/cmd_nand.c before loading a Image from a NAND device 2626 52 common/cmd_nand.c before loading a Image from a NAND device
2632 -53 common/cmd_nand.c Bad usage of "nand" command 2627 -53 common/cmd_nand.c Bad usage of "nand" command
2633 53 common/cmd_nand.c correct usage of "nand" command 2628 53 common/cmd_nand.c correct usage of "nand" command
2634 -54 common/cmd_nand.c No boot device 2629 -54 common/cmd_nand.c No boot device
2635 54 common/cmd_nand.c boot device found 2630 54 common/cmd_nand.c boot device found
2636 -55 common/cmd_nand.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device 2631 -55 common/cmd_nand.c Unknown Chip ID on boot device
2637 55 common/cmd_nand.c correct chip ID found, device available 2632 55 common/cmd_nand.c correct chip ID found, device available
2638 -56 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image Header on boot device 2633 -56 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image Header on boot device
2639 56 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image Header from NAND device OK 2634 56 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image Header from NAND device OK
2640 -57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has bad magic number 2635 -57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has bad magic number
2641 57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has correct magic number 2636 57 common/cmd_nand.c Image header has correct magic number
2642 -58 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image from NAND device 2637 -58 common/cmd_nand.c Error reading Image from NAND device
2643 58 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image from NAND device OK 2638 58 common/cmd_nand.c reading Image from NAND device OK
2644 2639
2645 -60 common/env_common.c Environment has a bad CRC, using default 2640 -60 common/env_common.c Environment has a bad CRC, using default
2646 2641
2647 64 net/eth.c starting with Ethernet configuration. 2642 64 net/eth.c starting with Ethernet configuration.
2648 -64 net/eth.c no Ethernet found. 2643 -64 net/eth.c no Ethernet found.
2649 65 net/eth.c Ethernet found. 2644 65 net/eth.c Ethernet found.
2650 2645
2651 -80 common/cmd_net.c usage wrong 2646 -80 common/cmd_net.c usage wrong
2652 80 common/cmd_net.c before calling net_loop() 2647 80 common/cmd_net.c before calling net_loop()
2653 -81 common/cmd_net.c some error in net_loop() occurred 2648 -81 common/cmd_net.c some error in net_loop() occurred
2654 81 common/cmd_net.c net_loop() back without error 2649 81 common/cmd_net.c net_loop() back without error
2655 -82 common/cmd_net.c size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded) 2650 -82 common/cmd_net.c size == 0 (File with size 0 loaded)
2656 82 common/cmd_net.c trying automatic boot 2651 82 common/cmd_net.c trying automatic boot
2657 83 common/cmd_net.c running "source" command 2652 83 common/cmd_net.c running "source" command
2658 -83 common/cmd_net.c some error in automatic boot or "source" command 2653 -83 common/cmd_net.c some error in automatic boot or "source" command
2659 84 common/cmd_net.c end without errors 2654 84 common/cmd_net.c end without errors
2660 2655
2661 FIT uImage format: 2656 FIT uImage format:
2662 2657
2663 Arg Where When 2658 Arg Where When
2664 100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has correct format 2659 100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has correct format
2665 -100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format 2660 -100 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel FIT Image has incorrect format
2666 101 common/cmd_bootm.c No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration 2661 101 common/cmd_bootm.c No Kernel subimage unit name, using configuration
2667 -101 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get configuration for kernel subimage 2662 -101 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get configuration for kernel subimage
2668 102 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel unit name specified 2663 102 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel unit name specified
2669 -103 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage node offset 2664 -103 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage node offset
2670 103 common/cmd_bootm.c Found configuration node 2665 103 common/cmd_bootm.c Found configuration node
2671 104 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage node offset 2666 104 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage node offset
2672 -104 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification failed 2667 -104 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification failed
2673 105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification OK 2668 105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage hash verification OK
2674 -105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture 2669 -105 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage is for unsupported architecture
2675 106 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK 2670 106 common/cmd_bootm.c Architecture check OK
2676 -106 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage has wrong type 2671 -106 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage has wrong type
2677 107 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage type OK 2672 107 common/cmd_bootm.c Kernel subimage type OK
2678 -107 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage data/size 2673 -107 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage data/size
2679 108 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage data/size 2674 108 common/cmd_bootm.c Got kernel subimage data/size
2680 -108 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT) 2675 -108 common/cmd_bootm.c Wrong image type (not legacy, FIT)
2681 -109 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage type 2676 -109 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage type
2682 -110 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage comp 2677 -110 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage comp
2683 -111 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage os 2678 -111 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage os
2684 -112 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage load address 2679 -112 common/cmd_bootm.c Can't get kernel subimage load address
2685 -113 common/cmd_bootm.c Image uncompress/copy overwrite error 2680 -113 common/cmd_bootm.c Image uncompress/copy overwrite error
2686 2681
2687 120 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification 2682 120 common/image.c Start initial ramdisk verification
2688 -120 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format 2683 -120 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has incorrect format
2689 121 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has correct format 2684 121 common/image.c Ramdisk FIT image has correct format
2690 122 common/image.c No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration 2685 122 common/image.c No ramdisk subimage unit name, using configuration
2691 -122 common/image.c Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage 2686 -122 common/image.c Can't get configuration for ramdisk subimage
2692 123 common/image.c Ramdisk unit name specified 2687 123 common/image.c Ramdisk unit name specified
2693 -124 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset 2688 -124 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage node offset
2694 125 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage node offset 2689 125 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage node offset
2695 -125 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed 2690 -125 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification failed
2696 126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK 2691 126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage hash verification OK
2697 -126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture 2692 -126 common/image.c Ramdisk subimage for unsupported architecture
2698 127 common/image.c Architecture check OK 2693 127 common/image.c Architecture check OK
2699 -127 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size 2694 -127 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk subimage data/size
2700 128 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage data/size 2695 128 common/image.c Got ramdisk subimage data/size
2701 129 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk load address 2696 129 common/image.c Can't get ramdisk load address
2702 -129 common/image.c Got ramdisk load address 2697 -129 common/image.c Got ramdisk load address
2703 2698
2704 -130 common/cmd_doc.c Incorrect FIT image format 2699 -130 common/cmd_doc.c Incorrect FIT image format
2705 131 common/cmd_doc.c FIT image format OK 2700 131 common/cmd_doc.c FIT image format OK
2706 2701
2707 -140 common/cmd_ide.c Incorrect FIT image format 2702 -140 common/cmd_ide.c Incorrect FIT image format
2708 141 common/cmd_ide.c FIT image format OK 2703 141 common/cmd_ide.c FIT image format OK
2709 2704
2710 -150 common/cmd_nand.c Incorrect FIT image format 2705 -150 common/cmd_nand.c Incorrect FIT image format
2711 151 common/cmd_nand.c FIT image format OK 2706 151 common/cmd_nand.c FIT image format OK
2712 2707
2713 - legacy image format: 2708 - legacy image format:
2714 CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY 2709 CONFIG_IMAGE_FORMAT_LEGACY
2715 enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot. 2710 enables the legacy image format support in U-Boot.
2716 2711
2717 Default: 2712 Default:
2718 enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined. 2713 enabled if CONFIG_FIT_SIGNATURE is not defined.
2719 2714
2720 CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY 2715 CONFIG_DISABLE_IMAGE_LEGACY
2721 disable the legacy image format 2716 disable the legacy image format
2722 2717
2723 This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is 2718 This define is introduced, as the legacy image format is
2724 enabled per default for backward compatibility. 2719 enabled per default for backward compatibility.
2725 2720
2726 - Standalone program support: 2721 - Standalone program support:
2727 CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR 2722 CONFIG_STANDALONE_LOAD_ADDR
2728 2723
2729 This option defines a board specific value for the 2724 This option defines a board specific value for the
2730 address where standalone program gets loaded, thus 2725 address where standalone program gets loaded, thus
2731 overwriting the architecture dependent default 2726 overwriting the architecture dependent default
2732 settings. 2727 settings.
2733 2728
2734 - Frame Buffer Address: 2729 - Frame Buffer Address:
2735 CONFIG_FB_ADDR 2730 CONFIG_FB_ADDR
2736 2731
2737 Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific 2732 Define CONFIG_FB_ADDR if you want to use specific
2738 address for frame buffer. This is typically the case 2733 address for frame buffer. This is typically the case
2739 when using a graphics controller has separate video 2734 when using a graphics controller has separate video
2740 memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at 2735 memory. U-Boot will then place the frame buffer at
2741 the given address instead of dynamically reserving it 2736 the given address instead of dynamically reserving it
2742 in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs 2737 in system RAM by calling lcd_setmem(), which grabs
2743 the memory for the frame buffer depending on the 2738 the memory for the frame buffer depending on the
2744 configured panel size. 2739 configured panel size.
2745 2740
2746 Please see board_init_f function. 2741 Please see board_init_f function.
2747 2742
2748 - Automatic software updates via TFTP server 2743 - Automatic software updates via TFTP server
2749 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP 2744 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP
2750 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX 2745 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_CNT_MAX
2751 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX 2746 CONFIG_UPDATE_TFTP_MSEC_MAX
2752 2747
2753 These options enable and control the auto-update feature; 2748 These options enable and control the auto-update feature;
2754 for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update. 2749 for a more detailed description refer to doc/README.update.
2755 2750
2756 - MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support) 2751 - MTD Support (mtdparts command, UBI support)
2757 CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE 2752 CONFIG_MTD_DEVICE
2758 2753
2759 Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel. 2754 Adds the MTD device infrastructure from the Linux kernel.
2760 Needed for mtdparts command support. 2755 Needed for mtdparts command support.
2761 2756
2762 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS 2757 CONFIG_MTD_PARTITIONS
2763 2758
2764 Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux 2759 Adds the MTD partitioning infrastructure from the Linux
2765 kernel. Needed for UBI support. 2760 kernel. Needed for UBI support.
2766 2761
2767 - UBI support 2762 - UBI support
2768 CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG 2763 CONFIG_UBI_SILENCE_MSG
2769 2764
2770 Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing. This leaves 2765 Make the verbose messages from UBI stop printing. This leaves
2771 warnings and errors enabled. 2766 warnings and errors enabled.
2772 2767
2773 2768
2774 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD 2769 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_WL_THRESHOLD
2775 This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest 2770 This parameter defines the maximum difference between the highest
2776 erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks 2771 erase counter value and the lowest erase counter value of eraseblocks
2777 of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing 2772 of UBI devices. When this threshold is exceeded, UBI starts performing
2778 wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase 2773 wear leveling by means of moving data from eraseblock with low erase
2779 counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter. 2774 counter to eraseblocks with high erase counter.
2780 2775
2781 The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and 2776 The default value should be OK for SLC NAND flashes, NOR flashes and
2782 other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more. 2777 other flashes which have eraseblock life-cycle 100000 or more.
2783 However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock 2778 However, in case of MLC NAND flashes which typically have eraseblock
2784 life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g., 2779 life-cycle less than 10000, the threshold should be lessened (e.g.,
2785 to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2). 2780 to 128 or 256, although it does not have to be power of 2).
2786 2781
2787 default: 4096 2782 default: 4096
2788 2783
2789 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT 2784 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_BEB_LIMIT
2790 This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI 2785 This option specifies the maximum bad physical eraseblocks UBI
2791 expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the 2786 expects on the MTD device (per 1024 eraseblocks). If the
2792 underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR 2787 underlying flash does not admit of bad eraseblocks (e.g. NOR
2793 flash), this value is ignored. 2788 flash), this value is ignored.
2794 2789
2795 NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM 2790 NAND datasheets often specify the minimum and maximum NVM
2796 (Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime. 2791 (Number of Valid Blocks) for the flashes' endurance lifetime.
2797 The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks 2792 The maximum expected bad eraseblocks per 1024 eraseblocks
2798 then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)", 2793 then can be calculated as "1024 * (1 - MinNVB / MaxNVB)",
2799 which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total 2794 which gives 20 for most NANDs (MaxNVB is basically the total
2800 count of eraseblocks on the chip). 2795 count of eraseblocks on the chip).
2801 2796
2802 To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to 2797 To put it differently, if this value is 20, UBI will try to
2803 reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks 2798 reserve about 1.9% of physical eraseblocks for bad blocks
2804 handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire 2799 handling. And that will be 1.9% of eraseblocks on the entire
2805 NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means 2800 NAND chip, not just the MTD partition UBI attaches. This means
2806 that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad 2801 that if you have, say, a NAND flash chip admits maximum 40 bad
2807 eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same 2802 eraseblocks, and it is split on two MTD partitions of the same
2808 size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a 2803 size, UBI will reserve 40 eraseblocks when attaching a
2809 partition. 2804 partition.
2810 2805
2811 default: 20 2806 default: 20
2812 2807
2813 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP 2808 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP
2814 Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device 2809 Fastmap is a mechanism which allows attaching an UBI device
2815 in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it 2810 in nearly constant time. Instead of scanning the whole MTD device it
2816 only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device. 2811 only has to locate a checkpoint (called fastmap) on the device.
2817 The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach 2812 The on-flash fastmap contains all information needed to attach
2818 the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where 2813 the device. Using fastmap makes only sense on large devices where
2819 attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install 2814 attaching by scanning takes long. UBI will not automatically install
2820 a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter 2815 a fastmap on old images, but you can set the UBI parameter
2821 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note 2816 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT to 1 if you want so. Please note
2822 that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations 2817 that fastmap-enabled images are still usable with UBI implementations
2823 without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap 2818 without fastmap support. On typical flash devices the whole fastmap
2824 fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps. 2819 fits into one PEB. UBI will reserve PEBs to hold two fastmaps.
2825 2820
2826 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT 2821 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FASTMAP_AUTOCONVERT
2827 Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images 2822 Set this parameter to enable fastmap automatically on images
2828 without a fastmap. 2823 without a fastmap.
2829 default: 0 2824 default: 0
2830 2825
2831 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG 2826 CONFIG_MTD_UBI_FM_DEBUG
2832 Enable UBI fastmap debug 2827 Enable UBI fastmap debug
2833 default: 0 2828 default: 0
2834 2829
2835 - UBIFS support 2830 - UBIFS support
2836 CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG 2831 CONFIG_UBIFS_SILENCE_MSG
2837 2832
2838 Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing. This leaves 2833 Make the verbose messages from UBIFS stop printing. This leaves
2839 warnings and errors enabled. 2834 warnings and errors enabled.
2840 2835
2841 - SPL framework 2836 - SPL framework
2842 CONFIG_SPL 2837 CONFIG_SPL
2843 Enable building of SPL globally. 2838 Enable building of SPL globally.
2844 2839
2845 CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT 2840 CONFIG_SPL_LDSCRIPT
2846 LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary. 2841 LDSCRIPT for linking the SPL binary.
2847 2842
2848 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT 2843 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT
2849 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included. 2844 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL, BSS included.
2850 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory 2845 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory
2851 used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it. 2846 used by SPL from _start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
2852 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE 2847 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
2853 must not be both defined at the same time. 2848 must not be both defined at the same time.
2854 2849
2855 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE 2850 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE
2856 Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and 2851 Maximum size of the SPL image (text, data, rodata, and
2857 linker lists sections), BSS excluded. 2852 linker lists sections), BSS excluded.
2858 When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does 2853 When defined, the linker checks that the actual size does
2859 not exceed it. 2854 not exceed it.
2860 2855
2861 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE 2856 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE
2862 TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary. 2857 TEXT_BASE for linking the SPL binary.
2863 2858
2864 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE 2859 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_TEXT_BASE
2865 Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to 2860 Address to relocate to. If unspecified, this is equal to
2866 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done). 2861 CONFIG_SPL_TEXT_BASE (i.e. no relocation is done).
2867 2862
2868 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR 2863 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_START_ADDR
2869 Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary. 2864 Link address for the BSS within the SPL binary.
2870 2865
2871 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE 2866 CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
2872 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS. 2867 Maximum size in memory allocated to the SPL BSS.
2873 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used 2868 When defined, the linker checks that the actual memory used
2874 by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it. 2869 by SPL from __bss_start to __bss_end does not exceed it.
2875 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE 2870 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_FOOTPRINT and CONFIG_SPL_BSS_MAX_SIZE
2876 must not be both defined at the same time. 2871 must not be both defined at the same time.
2877 2872
2878 CONFIG_SPL_STACK 2873 CONFIG_SPL_STACK
2879 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use 2874 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use
2880 2875
2881 CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE 2876 CONFIG_SPL_PANIC_ON_RAW_IMAGE
2882 When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has 2877 When defined, SPL will panic() if the image it has
2883 loaded does not have a signature. 2878 loaded does not have a signature.
2884 Defining this is useful when code which loads images 2879 Defining this is useful when code which loads images
2885 in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors 2880 in SPL cannot guarantee that absolutely all read errors
2886 will be caught. 2881 will be caught.
2887 An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will 2882 An example is the LPC32XX MLC NAND driver, which will
2888 consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad, 2883 consider that a completely unreadable NAND block is bad,
2889 and thus should be skipped silently. 2884 and thus should be skipped silently.
2890 2885
2891 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK 2886 CONFIG_SPL_RELOC_STACK
2892 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after 2887 Adress of the start of the stack SPL will use after
2893 relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to 2888 relocation. If unspecified, this is equal to
2894 CONFIG_SPL_STACK. 2889 CONFIG_SPL_STACK.
2895 2890
2896 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START 2891 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START
2897 Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL. 2892 Starting address of the malloc pool used in SPL.
2898 When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and 2893 When this option is set the full malloc is used in SPL and
2899 it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc() 2894 it is set up by spl_init() and before that, the simple malloc()
2900 can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined. 2895 can be used if CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F is defined.
2901 2896
2902 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE 2897 CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_SIZE
2903 The size of the malloc pool used in SPL. 2898 The size of the malloc pool used in SPL.
2904 2899
2905 CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK 2900 CONFIG_SPL_FRAMEWORK
2906 Enable the SPL framework under common/. This framework 2901 Enable the SPL framework under common/. This framework
2907 supports MMC, NAND and YMODEM loading of U-Boot and NAND 2902 supports MMC, NAND and YMODEM loading of U-Boot and NAND
2908 NAND loading of the Linux Kernel. 2903 NAND loading of the Linux Kernel.
2909 2904
2910 CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT 2905 CONFIG_SPL_OS_BOOT
2911 Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL. 2906 Enable booting directly to an OS from SPL.
2912 See also: doc/README.falcon 2907 See also: doc/README.falcon
2913 2908
2914 CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT 2909 CONFIG_SPL_DISPLAY_PRINT
2915 For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information 2910 For ARM, enable an optional function to print more information
2916 about the running system. 2911 about the running system.
2917 2912
2918 CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL 2913 CONFIG_SPL_INIT_MINIMAL
2919 Arch init code should be built for a very small image 2914 Arch init code should be built for a very small image
2920 2915
2921 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION 2916 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_U_BOOT_PARTITION
2922 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being 2917 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being
2923 used in raw mode 2918 used in raw mode
2924 2919
2925 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR 2920 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_KERNEL_SECTOR
2926 Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being 2921 Sector to load kernel uImage from when MMC is being
2927 used in raw mode (for Falcon mode) 2922 used in raw mode (for Falcon mode)
2928 2923
2929 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR, 2924 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTOR,
2930 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS 2925 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_RAW_MODE_ARGS_SECTORS
2931 Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument 2926 Sector and number of sectors to load kernel argument
2932 parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode 2927 parameters from when MMC is being used in raw mode
2933 (for falcon mode) 2928 (for falcon mode)
2934 2929
2935 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_FS_BOOT_PARTITION 2930 CONFIG_SYS_MMCSD_FS_BOOT_PARTITION
2936 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being 2931 Partition on the MMC to load U-Boot from when the MMC is being
2937 used in fs mode 2932 used in fs mode
2938 2933
2939 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME 2934 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_PAYLOAD_NAME
2940 Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem 2935 Filename to read to load U-Boot when reading from filesystem
2941 2936
2942 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME 2937 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_KERNEL_NAME
2943 Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading 2938 Filename to read to load kernel uImage when reading
2944 from filesystem (for Falcon mode) 2939 from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
2945 2940
2946 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME 2941 CONFIG_SPL_FS_LOAD_ARGS_NAME
2947 Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters 2942 Filename to read to load kernel argument parameters
2948 when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode) 2943 when reading from filesystem (for Falcon mode)
2949 2944
2950 CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND 2945 CONFIG_SPL_MPC83XX_WAIT_FOR_NAND
2951 Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that 2946 Set this for NAND SPL on PPC mpc83xx targets, so that
2952 start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before 2947 start.S waits for the rest of the SPL to load before
2953 continuing (the hardware starts execution after just 2948 continuing (the hardware starts execution after just
2954 loading the first page rather than the full 4K). 2949 loading the first page rather than the full 4K).
2955 2950
2956 CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE 2951 CONFIG_SPL_SKIP_RELOCATE
2957 Avoid SPL relocation 2952 Avoid SPL relocation
2958 2953
2959 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE 2954 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BASE
2960 Include nand_base.c in the SPL. Requires 2955 Include nand_base.c in the SPL. Requires
2961 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS. 2956 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS.
2962 2957
2963 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS 2958 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_DRIVERS
2964 SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers. 2959 SPL uses normal NAND drivers, not minimal drivers.
2965 2960
2966 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC 2961 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_ECC
2967 Include standard software ECC in the SPL 2962 Include standard software ECC in the SPL
2968 2963
2969 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE 2964 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_SIMPLE
2970 Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that 2965 Support for NAND boot using simple NAND drivers that
2971 expose the cmd_ctrl() interface. 2966 expose the cmd_ctrl() interface.
2972 2967
2973 CONFIG_SPL_UBI 2968 CONFIG_SPL_UBI
2974 Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and 2969 Support for a lightweight UBI (fastmap) scanner and
2975 loader 2970 loader
2976 2971
2977 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY 2972 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_RAW_ONLY
2978 Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only 2973 Support to boot only raw u-boot.bin images. Use this only
2979 if you need to save space. 2974 if you need to save space.
2980 2975
2981 CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR 2976 CONFIG_SPL_COMMON_INIT_DDR
2982 Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in 2977 Set for common ddr init with serial presence detect in
2983 SPL binary. 2978 SPL binary.
2984 2979
2985 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT, 2980 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_5_ADDR_CYCLE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_COUNT,
2986 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE, 2981 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_PAGE_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_OOBSIZE,
2987 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS, 2982 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BLOCK_SIZE, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BAD_BLOCK_POS,
2988 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE, 2983 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCPOS, CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCSIZE,
2989 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES 2984 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_ECCBYTES
2990 Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses 2985 Defines the size and behavior of the NAND that SPL uses
2991 to read U-Boot 2986 to read U-Boot
2992 2987
2993 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT 2988 CONFIG_SPL_NAND_BOOT
2994 Add support NAND boot 2989 Add support NAND boot
2995 2990
2996 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS 2991 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_OFFS
2997 Location in NAND to read U-Boot from 2992 Location in NAND to read U-Boot from
2998 2993
2999 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST 2994 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_DST
3000 Location in memory to load U-Boot to 2995 Location in memory to load U-Boot to
3001 2996
3002 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE 2997 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_SIZE
3003 Size of image to load 2998 Size of image to load
3004 2999
3005 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START 3000 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_U_BOOT_START
3006 Entry point in loaded image to jump to 3001 Entry point in loaded image to jump to
3007 3002
3008 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST 3003 CONFIG_SYS_NAND_HW_ECC_OOBFIRST
3009 Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the 3004 Define this if you need to first read the OOB and then the
3010 data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms. 3005 data. This is used, for example, on davinci platforms.
3011 3006
3012 CONFIG_SPL_OMAP3_ID_NAND 3007 CONFIG_SPL_OMAP3_ID_NAND
3013 Support for an OMAP3-specific set of functions to return the 3008 Support for an OMAP3-specific set of functions to return the
3014 ID and MFR of the first attached NAND chip, if present. 3009 ID and MFR of the first attached NAND chip, if present.
3015 3010
3016 CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE 3011 CONFIG_SPL_RAM_DEVICE
3017 Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary 3012 Support for running image already present in ram, in SPL binary
3018 3013
3019 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO 3014 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO
3020 Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending 3015 Image offset to which the SPL should be padded before appending
3021 the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as 3016 the SPL payload. By default, this is defined as
3022 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. 3017 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
3023 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL 3018 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
3024 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. 3019 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
3025 3020
3026 CONFIG_SPL_TARGET 3021 CONFIG_SPL_TARGET
3027 Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs 3022 Final target image containing SPL and payload. Some SPLs
3028 use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for 3023 use an arch-specific makefile fragment instead, for
3029 example if more than one image needs to be produced. 3024 example if more than one image needs to be produced.
3030 3025
3031 CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT 3026 CONFIG_FIT_SPL_PRINT
3032 Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of 3027 Printing information about a FIT image adds quite a bit of
3033 code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this 3028 code to SPL. So this is normally disabled in SPL. Use this
3034 option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the 3029 option to re-enable it. This will affect the output of the
3035 bootm command when booting a FIT image. 3030 bootm command when booting a FIT image.
3036 3031
3037 - TPL framework 3032 - TPL framework
3038 CONFIG_TPL 3033 CONFIG_TPL
3039 Enable building of TPL globally. 3034 Enable building of TPL globally.
3040 3035
3041 CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO 3036 CONFIG_TPL_PAD_TO
3042 Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending 3037 Image offset to which the TPL should be padded before appending
3043 the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as 3038 the TPL payload. By default, this is defined as
3044 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined. 3039 CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE, or 0 if CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE is undefined.
3045 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL 3040 CONFIG_SPL_PAD_TO must be either 0, meaning to append the SPL
3046 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE. 3041 payload without any padding, or >= CONFIG_SPL_MAX_SIZE.
3047 3042
3048 - Interrupt support (PPC): 3043 - Interrupt support (PPC):
3049 3044
3050 There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt() 3045 There are common interrupt_init() and timer_interrupt()
3051 for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu() 3046 for all PPC archs. interrupt_init() calls interrupt_init_cpu()
3052 for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu() 3047 for CPU specific initialization. interrupt_init_cpu()
3053 should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If 3048 should set decrementer_count to appropriate value. If
3054 CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt 3049 CPU resets decrementer automatically after interrupt
3055 (ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero. 3050 (ppc4xx) it should set decrementer_count to zero.
3056 timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU 3051 timer_interrupt() calls timer_interrupt_cpu() for CPU
3057 specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led 3052 specific handling. If board has watchdog / status_led
3058 / other_activity_monitor it works automatically from 3053 / other_activity_monitor it works automatically from
3059 general timer_interrupt(). 3054 general timer_interrupt().
3060 3055
3061 3056
3062 Board initialization settings: 3057 Board initialization settings:
3063 ------------------------------ 3058 ------------------------------
3064 3059
3065 During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions 3060 During Initialization u-boot calls a number of board specific functions
3066 to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup 3061 to allow the preparation of board specific prerequisites, e.g. pin setup
3067 before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the 3062 before drivers are initialized. To enable these callbacks the
3068 following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is 3063 following configuration macros have to be defined. Currently this is
3069 architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c 3064 architecture specific, so please check arch/your_architecture/lib/board.c
3070 typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r(). 3065 typically in board_init_f() and board_init_r().
3071 3066
3072 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f() 3067 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_F: Call board_early_init_f()
3073 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r() 3068 - CONFIG_BOARD_EARLY_INIT_R: Call board_early_init_r()
3074 - CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init() 3069 - CONFIG_BOARD_LATE_INIT: Call board_late_init()
3075 - CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init() 3070 - CONFIG_BOARD_POSTCLK_INIT: Call board_postclk_init()
3076 3071
3077 Configuration Settings: 3072 Configuration Settings:
3078 ----------------------- 3073 -----------------------
3079 3074
3080 - CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit. 3075 - CONFIG_SYS_SUPPORT_64BIT_DATA: Defined automatically if compiled as 64-bit.
3081 Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands. 3076 Optionally it can be defined to support 64-bit memory commands.
3082 3077
3083 - CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included; 3078 - CONFIG_SYS_LONGHELP: Defined when you want long help messages included;
3084 undefine this when you're short of memory. 3079 undefine this when you're short of memory.
3085 3080
3086 - CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default 3081 - CONFIG_SYS_HELP_CMD_WIDTH: Defined when you want to override the default
3087 width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output. 3082 width of the commands listed in the 'help' command output.
3088 3083
3089 - CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to 3084 - CONFIG_SYS_PROMPT: This is what U-Boot prints on the console to
3090 prompt for user input. 3085 prompt for user input.
3091 3086
3092 - CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console 3087 - CONFIG_SYS_CBSIZE: Buffer size for input from the Console
3093 3088
3094 - CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output 3089 - CONFIG_SYS_PBSIZE: Buffer size for Console output
3095 3090
3096 - CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands 3091 - CONFIG_SYS_MAXARGS: max. Number of arguments accepted for monitor commands
3097 3092
3098 - CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to 3093 - CONFIG_SYS_BARGSIZE: Buffer size for Boot Arguments which are passed to
3099 the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is 3094 the application (usually a Linux kernel) when it is
3100 booted 3095 booted
3101 3096
3102 - CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE: 3097 - CONFIG_SYS_BAUDRATE_TABLE:
3103 List of legal baudrate settings for this board. 3098 List of legal baudrate settings for this board.
3104 3099
3105 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END: 3100 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_START, CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_END:
3106 Begin and End addresses of the area used by the 3101 Begin and End addresses of the area used by the
3107 simple memory test. 3102 simple memory test.
3108 3103
3109 - CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST: 3104 - CONFIG_SYS_ALT_MEMTEST:
3110 Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test. 3105 Enable an alternate, more extensive memory test.
3111 3106
3112 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH: 3107 - CONFIG_SYS_MEMTEST_SCRATCH:
3113 Scratch address used by the alternate memory test 3108 Scratch address used by the alternate memory test
3114 You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable 3109 You only need to set this if address zero isn't writeable
3115 3110
3116 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE 3111 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE
3117 Only implemented for ARMv8 for now. 3112 Only implemented for ARMv8 for now.
3118 If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory 3113 If defined, the size of CONFIG_SYS_MEM_RESERVE_SECURE memory
3119 is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS. 3114 is substracted from total RAM and won't be reported to OS.
3120 This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable 3115 This memory can be used as secure memory. A variable
3121 gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems 3116 gd->arch.secure_ram is used to track the location. In systems
3122 the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks, 3117 the RAM base is not zero, or RAM is divided into banks,
3123 this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address. 3118 this variable needs to be recalcuated to get the address.
3124 3119
3125 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE: 3120 - CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE:
3126 If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header, 3121 If CONFIG_SYS_MEM_TOP_HIDE is defined in the board config header,
3127 this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top 3122 this specified memory area will get subtracted from the top
3128 (end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By 3123 (end) of RAM and won't get "touched" at all by U-Boot. By
3129 fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed 3124 fixing up gd->ram_size the Linux kernel should gets passed
3130 the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either. 3125 the now "corrected" memory size and won't touch it either.
3131 This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux 3126 This should work for arch/ppc and arch/powerpc. Only Linux
3132 board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that 3127 board ports in arch/powerpc with bootwrapper support that
3133 recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup 3128 recalculate the memory size from the SDRAM controller setup
3134 will have to get fixed in Linux additionally. 3129 will have to get fixed in Linux additionally.
3135 3130
3136 This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx 3131 This option can be used as a workaround for the 440EPx/GRx
3137 CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't 3132 CHIP 11 errata where the last 256 bytes in SDRAM shouldn't
3138 be touched. 3133 be touched.
3139 3134
3140 WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of 3135 WARNING: Please make sure that this value is a multiple of
3141 the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case, 3136 the Linux page size (normally 4k). If this is not the case,
3142 then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a 3137 then the end address of the Linux memory will be located at a
3143 non page size aligned address and this could cause major 3138 non page size aligned address and this could cause major
3144 problems. 3139 problems.
3145 3140
3146 - CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE: 3141 - CONFIG_SYS_LOADS_BAUD_CHANGE:
3147 Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download 3142 Enable temporary baudrate change while serial download
3148 3143
3149 - CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE: 3144 - CONFIG_SYS_SDRAM_BASE:
3150 Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here. 3145 Physical start address of SDRAM. _Must_ be 0 here.
3151 3146
3152 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE: 3147 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE:
3153 Physical start address of Flash memory. 3148 Physical start address of Flash memory.
3154 3149
3155 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE: 3150 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_BASE:
3156 Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by 3151 Physical start address of boot monitor code (set by
3157 make config files to be same as the text base address 3152 make config files to be same as the text base address
3158 (CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as 3153 (CONFIG_SYS_TEXT_BASE) used when linking) - same as
3159 CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash. 3154 CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_BASE when booting from flash.
3160 3155
3161 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN: 3156 - CONFIG_SYS_MONITOR_LEN:
3162 Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to 3157 Size of memory reserved for monitor code, used to
3163 determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is 3158 determine _at_compile_time_ (!) if the environment is
3164 embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate 3159 embedded within the U-Boot image, or in a separate
3165 flash sector. 3160 flash sector.
3166 3161
3167 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN: 3162 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN:
3168 Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use. 3163 Size of DRAM reserved for malloc() use.
3169 3164
3170 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN 3165 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_F_LEN
3171 Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If 3166 Size of the malloc() pool for use before relocation. If
3172 this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation 3167 this is defined, then a very simple malloc() implementation
3173 will become available before relocation. The address is just 3168 will become available before relocation. The address is just
3174 below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make 3169 below the global data, and the stack is moved down to make
3175 space. 3170 space.
3176 3171
3177 This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses 3172 This feature allocates regions with increasing addresses
3178 within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc() 3173 within the region. calloc() is supported, but realloc()
3179 is not available. free() is supported but does nothing. 3174 is not available. free() is supported but does nothing.
3180 The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when 3175 The memory will be freed (or in fact just forgotten) when
3181 U-Boot relocates itself. 3176 U-Boot relocates itself.
3182 3177
3183 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE 3178 - CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_SIMPLE
3184 Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those 3179 Provides a simple and small malloc() and calloc() for those
3185 boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is 3180 boards which do not use the full malloc in SPL (which is
3186 enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START). 3181 enabled with CONFIG_SYS_SPL_MALLOC_START).
3187 3182
3188 - CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY: 3183 - CONFIG_SYS_NONCACHED_MEMORY:
3189 Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be 3184 Size of non-cached memory area. This area of memory will be
3190 typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped 3185 typically located right below the malloc() area and mapped
3191 uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would 3186 uncached in the MMU. This is useful for drivers that would
3192 otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For 3187 otherwise require a lot of explicit cache maintenance. For
3193 some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the 3188 some drivers it's also impossible to properly maintain the
3194 cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed 3189 cache. For example if the regions that need to be flushed
3195 are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding 3190 are not a multiple of the cache-line size, *and* padding
3196 cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e. 3191 cannot be allocated between the regions to align them (i.e.
3197 if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the 3192 if the HW requires a contiguous array of regions, and the
3198 size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of 3193 size of each region is not cache-aligned), then a flush of
3199 one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has 3194 one region may result in overwriting data that hardware has
3200 written to another region in the same cache-line. This can 3195 written to another region in the same cache-line. This can
3201 happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for 3196 happen for example in network drivers where descriptors for
3202 buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g. 3197 buffers are typically smaller than the CPU cache-line (e.g.
3203 16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes). 3198 16 bytes vs. 32 or 64 bytes).
3204 3199
3205 Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present. 3200 Non-cached memory is only supported on 32-bit ARM at present.
3206 3201
3207 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN: 3202 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN:
3208 Normally compressed uImages are limited to an 3203 Normally compressed uImages are limited to an
3209 uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough, 3204 uncompressed size of 8 MBytes. If this is not enough,
3210 you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file 3205 you can define CONFIG_SYS_BOOTM_LEN in your board config file
3211 to adjust this setting to your needs. 3206 to adjust this setting to your needs.
3212 3207
3213 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ: 3208 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ:
3214 Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of 3209 Maximum size of memory mapped by the startup code of
3215 the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by 3210 the Linux kernel; all data that must be processed by
3216 the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if 3211 the Linux kernel (bd_info, boot arguments, FDT blob if
3217 used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low" 3212 used) must be put below this limit, unless "bootm_low"
3218 environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case 3213 environment variable is defined and non-zero. In such case
3219 all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low" 3214 all data for the Linux kernel must be between "bootm_low"
3220 and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment 3215 and "bootm_low" + CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. The environment
3221 variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of 3216 variable "bootm_mapsize" will override the value of
3222 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined, 3217 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ. If CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is undefined,
3223 then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead. 3218 then the value in "bootm_size" will be used instead.
3224 3219
3225 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH: 3220 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_RAMDISK_HIGH:
3226 Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the 3221 Enable initrd_high functionality. If defined then the
3227 initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand 3222 initrd_high feature is enabled and the bootm ramdisk subcommand
3228 is enabled. 3223 is enabled.
3229 3224
3230 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE: 3225 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_CMDLINE:
3231 Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between 3226 Enables allocating and saving kernel cmdline in space between
3232 "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. 3227 "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
3233 3228
3234 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD: 3229 - CONFIG_SYS_BOOT_GET_KBD:
3235 Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in 3230 Enables allocating and saving a kernel copy of the bd_info in
3236 space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ. 3231 space between "bootm_low" and "bootm_low" + BOOTMAPSZ.
3237 3232
3238 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS: 3233 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_BANKS:
3239 Max number of Flash memory banks 3234 Max number of Flash memory banks
3240 3235
3241 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT: 3236 - CONFIG_SYS_MAX_FLASH_SECT:
3242 Max number of sectors on a Flash chip 3237 Max number of sectors on a Flash chip
3243 3238
3244 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT: 3239 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_ERASE_TOUT:
3245 Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms) 3240 Timeout for Flash erase operations (in ms)
3246 3241
3247 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT: 3242 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_WRITE_TOUT:
3248 Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms) 3243 Timeout for Flash write operations (in ms)
3249 3244
3250 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT 3245 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_LOCK_TOUT
3251 Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms) 3246 Timeout for Flash set sector lock bit operation (in ms)
3252 3247
3253 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT 3248 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_UNLOCK_TOUT
3254 Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms) 3249 Timeout for Flash clear lock bits operation (in ms)
3255 3250
3256 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION 3251 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_PROTECTION
3257 If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used 3252 If defined, hardware flash sectors protection is used
3258 instead of U-Boot software protection. 3253 instead of U-Boot software protection.
3259 3254
3260 - CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP: 3255 - CONFIG_SYS_DIRECT_FLASH_TFTP:
3261 3256
3262 Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory; 3257 Enable TFTP transfers directly to flash memory;
3263 without this option such a download has to be 3258 without this option such a download has to be
3264 performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2) 3259 performed in two steps: (1) download to RAM, and (2)
3265 copy from RAM to flash. 3260 copy from RAM to flash.
3266 3261
3267 The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since 3262 The two-step approach is usually more reliable, since
3268 you can check if the download worked before you erase 3263 you can check if the download worked before you erase
3269 the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is 3264 the flash, but in some situations (when system RAM is
3270 too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the 3265 too limited to allow for a temporary copy of the
3271 downloaded image) this option may be very useful. 3266 downloaded image) this option may be very useful.
3272 3267
3273 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI: 3268 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_CFI:
3274 Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the 3269 Define if the flash driver uses extra elements in the
3275 common flash structure for storing flash geometry. 3270 common flash structure for storing flash geometry.
3276 3271
3277 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER 3272 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_DRIVER
3278 This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver 3273 This option also enables the building of the cfi_flash driver
3279 in the drivers directory 3274 in the drivers directory
3280 3275
3281 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD 3276 - CONFIG_FLASH_CFI_MTD
3282 This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver 3277 This option enables the building of the cfi_mtd driver
3283 in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash 3278 in the drivers directory. The driver exports CFI flash
3284 to the MTD layer. 3279 to the MTD layer.
3285 3280
3286 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE 3281 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_USE_BUFFER_WRITE
3287 Use buffered writes to flash. 3282 Use buffered writes to flash.
3288 3283
3289 - CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N 3284 - CONFIG_FLASH_SPANSION_S29WS_N
3290 s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered 3285 s29ws-n MirrorBit flash has non-standard addresses for buffered
3291 write commands. 3286 write commands.
3292 3287
3293 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST 3288 - CONFIG_SYS_FLASH_QUIET_TEST
3294 If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't 3289 If this option is defined, the common CFI flash doesn't
3295 print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This 3290 print it's warning upon not recognized FLASH banks. This
3296 is useful, if some of the configured banks are only 3291 is useful, if some of the configured banks are only
3297 optionally available. 3292 optionally available.
3298 3293
3299 - CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS 3294 - CONFIG_FLASH_SHOW_PROGRESS
3300 If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown 3295 If defined (must be an integer), print out countdown
3301 digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80 3296 digits and dots. Recommended value: 45 (9..1) for 80
3302 column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays. 3297 column displays, 15 (3..1) for 40 column displays.
3303 3298
3304 - CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY 3299 - CONFIG_FLASH_VERIFY
3305 If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared 3300 If defined, the content of the flash (destination) is compared
3306 against the source after the write operation. An error message 3301 against the source after the write operation. An error message
3307 will be printed when the contents are not identical. 3302 will be printed when the contents are not identical.
3308 Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases, 3303 Please note that this option is useless in nearly all cases,
3309 since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier 3304 since such flash programming errors usually are detected earlier
3310 while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable 3305 while unprotecting/erasing/programming. Please only enable
3311 this option if you really know what you are doing. 3306 this option if you really know what you are doing.
3312 3307
3313 - CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER: 3308 - CONFIG_SYS_RX_ETH_BUFFER:
3314 Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some 3309 Defines the number of Ethernet receive buffers. On some
3315 Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value 3310 Ethernet controllers it is recommended to set this value
3316 to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all 3311 to 8 or even higher (EEPRO100 or 405 EMAC), since all
3317 buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface 3312 buffers can be full shortly after enabling the interface
3318 on high Ethernet traffic. 3313 on high Ethernet traffic.
3319 Defaults to 4 if not defined. 3314 Defaults to 4 if not defined.
3320 3315
3321 - CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES 3316 - CONFIG_ENV_MAX_ENTRIES
3322 3317
3323 Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used 3318 Maximum number of entries in the hash table that is used
3324 internally to store the environment settings. The default 3319 internally to store the environment settings. The default
3325 setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most 3320 setting is supposed to be generous and should work in most
3326 cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see 3321 cases. This setting can be used to tune behaviour; see
3327 lib/hashtable.c for details. 3322 lib/hashtable.c for details.
3328 3323
3329 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT 3324 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
3330 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC 3325 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
3331 Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when 3326 Enable validation of the values given to environment variables when
3332 calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal, 3327 calling env set. Variables can be restricted to only decimal,
3333 hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined, 3328 hexadecimal, or boolean. If CONFIG_CMD_NET is also defined,
3334 the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address. 3329 the variables can also be restricted to IP address or MAC address.
3335 3330
3336 The format of the list is: 3331 The format of the list is:
3337 type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m] 3332 type_attribute = [s|d|x|b|i|m]
3338 access_attribute = [a|r|o|c] 3333 access_attribute = [a|r|o|c]
3339 attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute] 3334 attributes = type_attribute[access_attribute]
3340 entry = variable_name[:attributes] 3335 entry = variable_name[:attributes]
3341 list = entry[,list] 3336 list = entry[,list]
3342 3337
3343 The type attributes are: 3338 The type attributes are:
3344 s - String (default) 3339 s - String (default)
3345 d - Decimal 3340 d - Decimal
3346 x - Hexadecimal 3341 x - Hexadecimal
3347 b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF]) 3342 b - Boolean ([1yYtT|0nNfF])
3348 i - IP address 3343 i - IP address
3349 m - MAC address 3344 m - MAC address
3350 3345
3351 The access attributes are: 3346 The access attributes are:
3352 a - Any (default) 3347 a - Any (default)
3353 r - Read-only 3348 r - Read-only
3354 o - Write-once 3349 o - Write-once
3355 c - Change-default 3350 c - Change-default
3356 3351
3357 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT 3352 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_DEFAULT
3358 Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags" 3353 Define this to a list (string) to define the ".flags"
3359 environment variable in the default or embedded environment. 3354 environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
3360 3355
3361 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC 3356 - CONFIG_ENV_FLAGS_LIST_STATIC
3362 Define this to a list (string) to define validation that 3357 Define this to a list (string) to define validation that
3363 should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags" 3358 should be done if an entry is not found in the ".flags"
3364 environment variable. To override a setting in the static 3359 environment variable. To override a setting in the static
3365 list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the 3360 list, simply add an entry for the same variable name to the
3366 ".flags" variable. 3361 ".flags" variable.
3367 3362
3368 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a 3363 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
3369 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same 3364 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to define the same
3370 flags without explicitly listing them for each variable. 3365 flags without explicitly listing them for each variable.
3371 3366
3372 - CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE 3367 - CONFIG_ENV_ACCESS_IGNORE_FORCE
3373 If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable 3368 If defined, don't allow the -f switch to env set override variable
3374 access flags. 3369 access flags.
3375 3370
3376 - CONFIG_USE_STDINT 3371 - CONFIG_USE_STDINT
3377 If stdint.h is available with your toolchain you can define this 3372 If stdint.h is available with your toolchain you can define this
3378 option to enable it. You can provide option 'USE_STDINT=1' when 3373 option to enable it. You can provide option 'USE_STDINT=1' when
3379 building U-Boot to enable this. 3374 building U-Boot to enable this.
3380 3375
3381 The following definitions that deal with the placement and management 3376 The following definitions that deal with the placement and management
3382 of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the 3377 of environment data (variable area); in general, we support the
3383 following configurations: 3378 following configurations:
3384 3379
3385 - CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC: 3380 - CONFIG_BUILD_ENVCRC:
3386 3381
3387 Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils 3382 Builds up envcrc with the target environment so that external utils
3388 may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images. 3383 may easily extract it and embed it in final U-Boot images.
3389 3384
3390 BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early 3385 BE CAREFUL! The first access to the environment happens quite early
3391 in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the 3386 in U-Boot initialization (when we try to get the setting of for the
3392 console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or 3387 console baudrate). You *MUST* have mapped your NVRAM area then, or
3393 U-Boot will hang. 3388 U-Boot will hang.
3394 3389
3395 Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the 3390 Please note that even with NVRAM we still use a copy of the
3396 environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to 3391 environment in RAM: we could work on NVRAM directly, but we want to
3397 keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv" 3392 keep settings there always unmodified except somebody uses "saveenv"
3398 to save the current settings. 3393 to save the current settings.
3399 3394
3400 BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use 3395 BE CAREFUL! For some special cases, the local device can not use
3401 "saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the 3396 "saveenv" command. For example, the local device will get the
3402 environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link, 3397 environment stored in a remote NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE link,
3403 but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface. 3398 but it can not erase, write this NOR flash by SRIO or PCIE interface.
3404 3399
3405 - CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST 3400 - CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST
3406 3401
3407 Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the 3402 Defines address in RAM to which the nand_spl code should copy the
3408 environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to 3403 environment. If redundant environment is used, it will be copied to
3409 CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE. 3404 CONFIG_NAND_ENV_DST + CONFIG_ENV_SIZE.
3410 3405
3411 Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor 3406 Please note that the environment is read-only until the monitor
3412 has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been 3407 has been relocated to RAM and a RAM copy of the environment has been
3413 created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use getenv_f() 3408 created; also, when using EEPROM you will have to use getenv_f()
3414 until then to read environment variables. 3409 until then to read environment variables.
3415 3410
3416 The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor 3411 The environment is protected by a CRC32 checksum. Before the monitor
3417 is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working 3412 is relocated into RAM, as a result of a bad CRC you will be working
3418 with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is 3413 with the compiled-in default environment - *silently*!!! [This is
3419 necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the 3414 necessary, because the first environment variable we need is the
3420 "baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't 3415 "baudrate" setting for the console - if we have a bad CRC, we don't
3421 have any device yet where we could complain.] 3416 have any device yet where we could complain.]
3422 3417
3423 Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if 3418 Note: once the monitor has been relocated, then it will complain if
3424 the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you 3419 the default environment is used; a new CRC is computed as soon as you
3425 use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment. 3420 use the "saveenv" command to store a valid environment.
3426 3421
3427 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN: 3422 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_ECHO_LINK_DOWN:
3428 Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED. 3423 Echo the inverted Ethernet link state to the fault LED.
3429 3424
3430 Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR 3425 Note: If this option is active, then CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR
3431 also needs to be defined. 3426 also needs to be defined.
3432 3427
3433 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR: 3428 - CONFIG_SYS_FAULT_MII_ADDR:
3434 MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state. 3429 MII address of the PHY to check for the Ethernet link state.
3435 3430
3436 - CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS: 3431 - CONFIG_NS16550_MIN_FUNCTIONS:
3437 Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init 3432 Define this if you desire to only have use of the NS16550_init
3438 and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at 3433 and NS16550_putc functions for the serial driver located at
3439 drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving 3434 drivers/serial/ns16550.c. This option is useful for saving
3440 space for already greatly restricted images, including but not 3435 space for already greatly restricted images, including but not
3441 limited to NAND_SPL configurations. 3436 limited to NAND_SPL configurations.
3442 3437
3443 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO 3438 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO
3444 Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on 3439 Display information about the board that U-Boot is running on
3445 when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called 3440 when U-Boot starts up. The board function checkboard() is called
3446 to do this. 3441 to do this.
3447 3442
3448 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE 3443 - CONFIG_DISPLAY_BOARDINFO_LATE
3449 Similar to the previous option, but display this information 3444 Similar to the previous option, but display this information
3450 later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if 3445 later, once stdio is running and output goes to the LCD, if
3451 present. 3446 present.
3452 3447
3453 - CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT: 3448 - CONFIG_BOARD_SIZE_LIMIT:
3454 Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the 3449 Maximum size of the U-Boot image. When defined, the
3455 build system checks that the actual size does not 3450 build system checks that the actual size does not
3456 exceed it. 3451 exceed it.
3457 3452
3458 Low Level (hardware related) configuration options: 3453 Low Level (hardware related) configuration options:
3459 --------------------------------------------------- 3454 ---------------------------------------------------
3460 3455
3461 - CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE: 3456 - CONFIG_SYS_CACHELINE_SIZE:
3462 Cache Line Size of the CPU. 3457 Cache Line Size of the CPU.
3463 3458
3464 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT: 3459 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT:
3465 Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale 3460 Default (power-on reset) physical address of CCSR on Freescale
3466 PowerPC SOCs. 3461 PowerPC SOCs.
3467 3462
3468 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR: 3463 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR:
3469 Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically 3464 Virtual address of CCSR. On a 32-bit build, this is typically
3470 the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. 3465 the same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT.
3471 3466
3472 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS: 3467 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS:
3473 Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new 3468 Physical address of CCSR. CCSR can be relocated to a new
3474 physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should 3469 physical address, if desired. In this case, this macro should
3475 be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the 3470 be set to that address. Otherwise, it should be set to the
3476 same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR 3471 same value as CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_DEFAULT. For example, CCSR
3477 is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended 3472 is typically relocated on 36-bit builds. It is recommended
3478 that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros: 3473 that this macro be defined via the _HIGH and _LOW macros:
3479 3474
3480 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH 3475 #define CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS ((CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH
3481 * 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW) 3476 * 1ull) << 32 | CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW)
3482 3477
3483 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH: 3478 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_HIGH:
3484 Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically 3479 Bits 33-36 of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This value is typically
3485 either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is 3480 either 0 (32-bit build) or 0xF (36-bit build). This macro is
3486 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or 3481 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
3487 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). 3482 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
3488 3483
3489 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW: 3484 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS_LOW:
3490 Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is 3485 Lower 32-bits of CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS. This macro is
3491 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or 3486 used in assembly code, so it must not contain typecasts or
3492 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL"). 3487 integer size suffixes (e.g. "ULL").
3493 3488
3494 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE: 3489 - CONFIG_SYS_CCSR_DO_NOT_RELOCATE:
3495 If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be 3490 If this macro is defined, then CONFIG_SYS_CCSRBAR_PHYS will be
3496 forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated. 3491 forced to a value that ensures that CCSR is not relocated.
3497 3492
3498 - Floppy Disk Support: 3493 - Floppy Disk Support:
3499 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER 3494 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER
3500 3495
3501 the default drive number (default value 0) 3496 the default drive number (default value 0)
3502 3497
3503 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE 3498 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE
3504 3499
3505 defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers 3500 defines the spacing between FDC chipset registers
3506 (default value 1) 3501 (default value 1)
3507 3502
3508 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET 3503 CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET
3509 3504
3510 defines the offset of register from address. It 3505 defines the offset of register from address. It
3511 depends on which part of the data bus is connected to 3506 depends on which part of the data bus is connected to
3512 the FDC chipset. (default value 0) 3507 the FDC chipset. (default value 0)
3513 3508
3514 If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and 3509 If CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_STRIDE CONFIG_SYS_ISA_IO_OFFSET and
3515 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their 3510 CONFIG_SYS_FDC_DRIVE_NUMBER are undefined, they take their
3516 default value. 3511 default value.
3517 3512
3518 if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function 3513 if CONFIG_SYS_FDC_HW_INIT is defined, then the function
3519 fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC 3514 fdc_hw_init() is called at the beginning of the FDC
3520 setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board 3515 setup. fdc_hw_init() must be provided by the board
3521 source code. It is used to make hardware-dependent 3516 source code. It is used to make hardware-dependent
3522 initializations. 3517 initializations.
3523 3518
3524 - CONFIG_IDE_AHB: 3519 - CONFIG_IDE_AHB:
3525 Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI 3520 Most IDE controllers were designed to be connected with PCI
3526 interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface. 3521 interface. Only few of them were designed for AHB interface.
3527 When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to 3522 When software is doing ATA command and data transfer to
3528 IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional 3523 IDE devices through IDE-AHB controller, some additional
3529 registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller 3524 registers accessing to these kind of IDE-AHB controller
3530 is required. 3525 is required.
3531 3526
3532 - CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory. 3527 - CONFIG_SYS_IMMR: Physical address of the Internal Memory.
3533 DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're 3528 DO NOT CHANGE unless you know exactly what you're
3534 doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only] 3529 doing! (11-4) [MPC8xx systems only]
3535 3530
3536 - CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR: 3531 - CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR:
3537 3532
3538 Start address of memory area that can be used for 3533 Start address of memory area that can be used for
3539 initial data and stack; please note that this must be 3534 initial data and stack; please note that this must be
3540 writable memory that is working WITHOUT special 3535 writable memory that is working WITHOUT special
3541 initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which 3536 initialization, i. e. you CANNOT use normal RAM which
3542 will become available only after programming the 3537 will become available only after programming the
3543 memory controller and running certain initialization 3538 memory controller and running certain initialization
3544 sequences. 3539 sequences.
3545 3540
3546 U-Boot uses the following memory types: 3541 U-Boot uses the following memory types:
3547 - MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU) 3542 - MPC8xx: IMMR (internal memory of the CPU)
3548 3543
3549 - CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET: 3544 - CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET:
3550 3545
3551 Offset of the initial data structure in the memory 3546 Offset of the initial data structure in the memory
3552 area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually 3547 area defined by CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR. Usually
3553 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial 3548 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET is chosen such that the initial
3554 data is located at the end of the available space 3549 data is located at the end of the available space
3555 (sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE - 3550 (sometimes written as (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_SIZE -
3556 GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just 3551 GENERATED_GBL_DATA_SIZE), and the initial stack is just
3557 below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR + 3552 below that area (growing from (CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR +
3558 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward. 3553 CONFIG_SYS_GBL_DATA_OFFSET) downward.
3559 3554
3560 Note: 3555 Note:
3561 On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data 3556 On the MPC824X (or other systems that use the data
3562 cache for initial memory) the address chosen for 3557 cache for initial memory) the address chosen for
3563 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must 3558 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR is basically arbitrary - it must
3564 point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between 3559 point to an otherwise UNUSED address space between
3565 the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space. 3560 the top of RAM and the start of the PCI space.
3566 3561
3567 - CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27) 3562 - CONFIG_SYS_SCCR: System Clock and reset Control Register (15-27)
3568 3563
3569 - CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM: 3564 - CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM:
3570 SDRAM timing 3565 SDRAM timing
3571 3566
3572 - CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA: 3567 - CONFIG_SYS_MAMR_PTA:
3573 periodic timer for refresh 3568 periodic timer for refresh
3574 3569
3575 - FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM, 3570 - FLASH_BASE0_PRELIM, FLASH_BASE1_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_REMAP_OR_AM,
3576 CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP, 3571 CONFIG_SYS_PRELIM_OR_AM, CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_FLASH, CONFIG_SYS_OR0_REMAP,
3577 CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM, 3572 CONFIG_SYS_OR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR0_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_REMAP, CONFIG_SYS_OR1_PRELIM,
3578 CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM: 3573 CONFIG_SYS_BR1_PRELIM:
3579 Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH) 3574 Memory Controller Definitions: BR0/1 and OR0/1 (FLASH)
3580 3575
3581 - SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE, 3576 - SDRAM_BASE2_PRELIM, SDRAM_BASE3_PRELIM, SDRAM_MAX_SIZE,
3582 CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM, 3577 CONFIG_SYS_OR_TIMING_SDRAM, CONFIG_SYS_OR2_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR2_PRELIM,
3583 CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM: 3578 CONFIG_SYS_OR3_PRELIM, CONFIG_SYS_BR3_PRELIM:
3584 Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM) 3579 Memory Controller Definitions: BR2/3 and OR2/3 (SDRAM)
3585 3580
3586 - CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY 3581 - CONFIG_PCI_ENUM_ONLY
3587 Only scan through and get the devices on the buses. 3582 Only scan through and get the devices on the buses.
3588 Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or 3583 Don't do any setup work, presumably because someone or
3589 something has already done it, and we don't need to do it 3584 something has already done it, and we don't need to do it
3590 a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted 3585 a second time. Useful for platforms that are pre-booted
3591 by coreboot or similar. 3586 by coreboot or similar.
3592 3587
3593 - CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE: 3588 - CONFIG_PCI_INDIRECT_BRIDGE:
3594 Enable support for indirect PCI bridges. 3589 Enable support for indirect PCI bridges.
3595 3590
3596 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIO: 3591 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIO:
3597 Chip has SRIO or not 3592 Chip has SRIO or not
3598 3593
3599 - CONFIG_SRIO1: 3594 - CONFIG_SRIO1:
3600 Board has SRIO 1 port available 3595 Board has SRIO 1 port available
3601 3596
3602 - CONFIG_SRIO2: 3597 - CONFIG_SRIO2:
3603 Board has SRIO 2 port available 3598 Board has SRIO 2 port available
3604 3599
3605 - CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER 3600 - CONFIG_SRIO_PCIE_BOOT_MASTER
3606 Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE 3601 Board can support master function for Boot from SRIO and PCIE
3607 3602
3608 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT: 3603 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_VIRT:
3609 Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region 3604 Virtual Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
3610 3605
3611 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS: 3606 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_PHYS:
3612 Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region 3607 Physical Address of SRIO port 'n' memory region
3613 3608
3614 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE: 3609 - CONFIG_SYS_SRIOn_MEM_SIZE:
3615 Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region 3610 Size of SRIO port 'n' memory region
3616 3611
3617 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT 3612 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_BUSWIDTH_16BIT
3618 Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using 3613 Defined to tell the NAND controller that the NAND chip is using
3619 a 16 bit bus. 3614 a 16 bit bus.
3620 Not all NAND drivers use this symbol. 3615 Not all NAND drivers use this symbol.
3621 Example of drivers that use it: 3616 Example of drivers that use it:
3622 - drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c 3617 - drivers/mtd/nand/ndfc.c
3623 - drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c 3618 - drivers/mtd/nand/mxc_nand.c
3624 3619
3625 - CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG 3620 - CONFIG_SYS_NDFC_EBC0_CFG
3626 Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined 3621 Sets the EBC0_CFG register for the NDFC. If not defined
3627 a default value will be used. 3622 a default value will be used.
3628 3623
3629 - CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM 3624 - CONFIG_SPD_EEPROM
3630 Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common 3625 Get DDR timing information from an I2C EEPROM. Common
3631 with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs 3626 with pluggable memory modules such as SODIMMs
3632 3627
3633 SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS 3628 SPD_EEPROM_ADDRESS
3634 I2C address of the SPD EEPROM 3629 I2C address of the SPD EEPROM
3635 3630
3636 - CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM 3631 - CONFIG_SYS_SPD_BUS_NUM
3637 If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first 3632 If SPD EEPROM is on an I2C bus other than the first
3638 one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve 3633 one, specify here. Note that the value must resolve
3639 to something your driver can deal with. 3634 to something your driver can deal with.
3640 3635
3641 - CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING 3636 - CONFIG_SYS_DDR_RAW_TIMING
3642 Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with 3637 Get DDR timing information from other than SPD. Common with
3643 soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing 3638 soldered DDR chips onboard without SPD. DDR raw timing
3644 parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into 3639 parameters are extracted from datasheet and hard-coded into
3645 header files or board specific files. 3640 header files or board specific files.
3646 3641
3647 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE 3642 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_INTERACTIVE
3648 Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr. 3643 Enable interactive DDR debugging. See doc/README.fsl-ddr.
3649 3644
3650 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH 3645 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_SYNC_REFRESH
3651 Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers. 3646 Enable sync of refresh for multiple controllers.
3652 3647
3653 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST 3648 - CONFIG_FSL_DDR_BIST
3654 Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers. 3649 Enable built-in memory test for Freescale DDR controllers.
3655 3650
3656 - CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0 3651 - CONFIG_SYS_83XX_DDR_USES_CS0
3657 Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should 3652 Only for 83xx systems. If specified, then DDR should
3658 be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3. 3653 be configured using CS0 and CS1 instead of CS2 and CS3.
3659 3654
3660 - CONFIG_RMII 3655 - CONFIG_RMII
3661 Enable RMII mode for all FECs. 3656 Enable RMII mode for all FECs.
3662 Note that this is a global option, we can't 3657 Note that this is a global option, we can't
3663 have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode. 3658 have one FEC in standard MII mode and another in RMII mode.
3664 3659
3665 - CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY 3660 - CONFIG_CRC32_VERIFY
3666 Add a verify option to the crc32 command. 3661 Add a verify option to the crc32 command.
3667 The syntax is: 3662 The syntax is:
3668 3663
3669 => crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32> 3664 => crc32 -v <address> <count> <crc32>
3670 3665
3671 Where address/count indicate a memory area 3666 Where address/count indicate a memory area
3672 and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the 3667 and crc32 is the correct crc32 which the
3673 area should have. 3668 area should have.
3674 3669
3675 - CONFIG_LOOPW 3670 - CONFIG_LOOPW
3676 Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if 3671 Add the "loopw" memory command. This only takes effect if
3677 the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). 3672 the memory commands are activated globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
3678 3673
3679 - CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC 3674 - CONFIG_MX_CYCLIC
3680 Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic 3675 Add the "mdc" and "mwc" memory commands. These are cyclic
3681 "md/mw" commands. 3676 "md/mw" commands.
3682 Examples: 3677 Examples:
3683 3678
3684 => mdc.b 10 4 500 3679 => mdc.b 10 4 500
3685 This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms. 3680 This command will print 4 bytes (10,11,12,13) each 500 ms.
3686 3681
3687 => mwc.l 100 12345678 10 3682 => mwc.l 100 12345678 10
3688 This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms. 3683 This command will write 12345678 to address 100 all 10 ms.
3689 3684
3690 This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated 3685 This only takes effect if the memory commands are activated
3691 globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY). 3686 globally (CONFIG_CMD_MEMORY).
3692 3687
3693 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT 3688 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT
3694 [ARM, NDS32, MIPS only] If this variable is defined, then certain 3689 [ARM, NDS32, MIPS only] If this variable is defined, then certain
3695 low level initializations (like setting up the memory 3690 low level initializations (like setting up the memory
3696 controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not 3691 controller) are omitted and/or U-Boot does not
3697 relocate itself into RAM. 3692 relocate itself into RAM.
3698 3693
3699 Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only 3694 Normally this variable MUST NOT be defined. The only
3700 exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some 3695 exception is when U-Boot is loaded (to RAM) by some
3701 other boot loader or by a debugger which performs 3696 other boot loader or by a debugger which performs
3702 these initializations itself. 3697 these initializations itself.
3703 3698
3704 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY 3699 - CONFIG_SKIP_LOWLEVEL_INIT_ONLY
3705 [ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init() 3700 [ARM926EJ-S only] This allows just the call to lowlevel_init()
3706 to be skipped. The normal CP15 init (such as enabling the 3701 to be skipped. The normal CP15 init (such as enabling the
3707 instruction cache) is still performed. 3702 instruction cache) is still performed.
3708 3703
3709 - CONFIG_SPL_BUILD 3704 - CONFIG_SPL_BUILD
3710 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader 3705 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader
3711 that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when 3706 that is executed before the actual U-Boot. E.g. when
3712 compiling a NAND SPL. 3707 compiling a NAND SPL.
3713 3708
3714 - CONFIG_TPL_BUILD 3709 - CONFIG_TPL_BUILD
3715 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader 3710 Modifies the behaviour of start.S when compiling a loader
3716 that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot. 3711 that is executed after the SPL and before the actual U-Boot.
3717 It is loaded by the SPL. 3712 It is loaded by the SPL.
3718 3713
3719 - CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC 3714 - CONFIG_SYS_MPC85XX_NO_RESETVEC
3720 Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section 3715 Only for 85xx systems. If this variable is specified, the section
3721 .resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the 3716 .resetvec is not kept and the section .bootpg is placed in the
3722 previous 4k of the .text section. 3717 previous 4k of the .text section.
3723 3718
3724 - CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM 3719 - CONFIG_ARCH_MAP_SYSMEM
3725 Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses 3720 Generally U-Boot (and in particular the md command) uses
3726 effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard 3721 effective address. It is therefore not necessary to regard
3727 U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated 3722 U-Boot address as virtual addresses that need to be translated
3728 to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since 3723 to physical addresses. However, sandbox requires this, since
3729 it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all 3724 it maintains its own little RAM buffer which contains all
3730 addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses 3725 addressable memory. This option causes some memory accesses
3731 to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem(). 3726 to be mapped through map_sysmem() / unmap_sysmem().
3732 3727
3733 - CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR 3728 - CONFIG_X86_RESET_VECTOR
3734 If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not 3729 If defined, the x86 reset vector code is included. This is not
3735 needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot. 3730 needed when U-Boot is running from Coreboot.
3736 3731
3737 - CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC: 3732 - CONFIG_SPL_AM33XX_ENABLE_RTC32K_OSC:
3738 Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms 3733 Enables the RTC32K OSC on AM33xx based plattforms
3739 3734
3740 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE 3735 - CONFIG_SYS_NAND_NO_SUBPAGE_WRITE
3741 Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver 3736 Option to disable subpage write in NAND driver
3742 driver that uses this: 3737 driver that uses this:
3743 drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c 3738 drivers/mtd/nand/davinci_nand.c
3744 3739
3745 Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support: 3740 Freescale QE/FMAN Firmware Support:
3746 ----------------------------------- 3741 -----------------------------------
3747 3742
3748 The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the 3743 The Freescale QUICCEngine (QE) and Frame Manager (FMAN) both support the
3749 loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format. 3744 loading of "firmware", which is encoded in the QE firmware binary format.
3750 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros 3745 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
3751 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address 3746 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
3752 within that device. 3747 within that device.
3753 3748
3754 - CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR 3749 - CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR
3755 The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The 3750 The address in the storage device where the FMAN microcode is located. The
3756 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro 3751 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
3757 is also specified. 3752 is also specified.
3758 3753
3759 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR 3754 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_ADDR
3760 The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The 3755 The address in the storage device where the QE microcode is located. The
3761 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro 3756 meaning of this address depends on which CONFIG_SYS_QE_FW_IN_xxx macro
3762 is also specified. 3757 is also specified.
3763 3758
3764 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH 3759 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_LENGTH
3765 The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format 3760 The maximum possible size of the firmware. The firmware binary format
3766 has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it 3761 has a field that specifies the actual size of the firmware, but it
3767 might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some 3762 might not be possible to read any part of the firmware unless some
3768 local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first. 3763 local storage is allocated to hold the entire firmware first.
3769 3764
3770 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR 3765 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NOR
3771 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as 3766 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NOR flash, mapped as
3772 normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the 3767 normal addressable memory via the LBC. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the
3773 virtual address in NOR flash. 3768 virtual address in NOR flash.
3774 3769
3775 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND 3770 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_NAND
3776 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash. 3771 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in NAND flash.
3777 CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash. 3772 CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the offset within NAND flash.
3778 3773
3779 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC 3774 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_MMC
3780 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC 3775 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located on the primary SD/MMC
3781 device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device. 3776 device. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is the byte offset on that device.
3782 3777
3783 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE 3778 - CONFIG_SYS_QE_FMAN_FW_IN_REMOTE
3784 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master) 3779 Specifies that QE/FMAN firmware is located in the remote (master)
3785 memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which 3780 memory space. CONFIG_SYS_FMAN_FW_ADDR is a virtual address which
3786 can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound 3781 can be mapped from slave TLB->slave LAW->slave SRIO or PCIE outbound
3787 window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in 3782 window->master inbound window->master LAW->the ucode address in
3788 master's memory space. 3783 master's memory space.
3789 3784
3790 Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support: 3785 Freescale Layerscape Management Complex Firmware Support:
3791 --------------------------------------------------------- 3786 ---------------------------------------------------------
3792 The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of 3787 The Freescale Layerscape Management Complex (MC) supports the loading of
3793 "firmware". 3788 "firmware".
3794 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros 3789 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting, so macros
3795 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address 3790 are used to identify the storage device (NOR flash, SPI, etc) and the address
3796 within that device. 3791 within that device.
3797 3792
3798 - CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET 3793 - CONFIG_FSL_MC_ENET
3799 Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs. 3794 Enable the MC driver for Layerscape SoCs.
3800 3795
3801 Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support: 3796 Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support:
3802 ------------------------------------------- 3797 -------------------------------------------
3803 The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of 3798 The Freescale Layerscape Debug Server Support supports the loading of
3804 "Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom. 3799 "Debug Server firmware" and triggering SP boot-rom.
3805 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting. 3800 This firmware often needs to be loaded during U-Boot booting.
3806 3801
3807 - CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN 3802 - CONFIG_SYS_MC_RSV_MEM_ALIGN
3808 Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires 3803 Define alignment of reserved memory MC requires
3809 3804
3810 Reproducible builds 3805 Reproducible builds
3811 ------------------- 3806 -------------------
3812 3807
3813 In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build 3808 In order to achieve reproducible builds, timestamps used in the U-Boot build
3814 process have to be set to a fixed value. 3809 process have to be set to a fixed value.
3815 3810
3816 This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable. 3811 This is done using the SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH environment variable.
3817 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration 3812 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH is to be set on the build host's shell, not as a configuration
3818 option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot. 3813 option for U-Boot or an environment variable in U-Boot.
3819 3814
3820 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC. 3815 SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH should be set to a number of seconds since the epoch, in UTC.
3821 3816
3822 Building the Software: 3817 Building the Software:
3823 ====================== 3818 ======================
3824 3819
3825 Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments 3820 Building U-Boot has been tested in several native build environments
3826 and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support 3821 and in many different cross environments. Of course we cannot support
3827 all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all 3822 all possibly existing versions of cross development tools in all
3828 (potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we 3823 (potentially obsolete) versions. In case of tool chain problems we
3829 recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK) 3824 recommend to use the ELDK (see http://www.denx.de/wiki/DULG/ELDK)
3830 which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot. 3825 which is extensively used to build and test U-Boot.
3831 3826
3832 If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you 3827 If you are not using a native environment, it is assumed that you
3833 have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case, 3828 have GNU cross compiling tools available in your path. In this case,
3834 you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell. 3829 you must set the environment variable CROSS_COMPILE in your shell.
3835 Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are 3830 Note that no changes to the Makefile or any other source files are
3836 necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter: 3831 necessary. For example using the ELDK on a 4xx CPU, please enter:
3837 3832
3838 $ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx- 3833 $ CROSS_COMPILE=ppc_4xx-
3839 $ export CROSS_COMPILE 3834 $ export CROSS_COMPILE
3840 3835
3841 Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in 3836 Note: If you wish to generate Windows versions of the utilities in
3842 the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain 3837 the tools directory you can use the MinGW toolchain
3843 (http://www.mingw.org). Set your HOST tools to the MinGW 3838 (http://www.mingw.org). Set your HOST tools to the MinGW
3844 toolchain and execute 'make tools'. For example: 3839 toolchain and execute 'make tools'. For example:
3845 3840
3846 $ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools 3841 $ make HOSTCC=i586-mingw32msvc-gcc HOSTSTRIP=i586-mingw32msvc-strip tools
3847 3842
3848 Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can 3843 Binaries such as tools/mkimage.exe will be created which can
3849 be executed on computers running Windows. 3844 be executed on computers running Windows.
3850 3845
3851 U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the 3846 U-Boot is intended to be simple to build. After installing the
3852 sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This 3847 sources you must configure U-Boot for one specific board type. This
3853 is done by typing: 3848 is done by typing:
3854 3849
3855 make NAME_defconfig 3850 make NAME_defconfig
3856 3851
3857 where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu- 3852 where "NAME_defconfig" is the name of one of the existing configu-
3858 rations; see boards.cfg for supported names. 3853 rations; see boards.cfg for supported names.
3859 3854
3860 Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if 3855 Note: for some board special configuration names may exist; check if
3861 additional information is available from the board vendor; for 3856 additional information is available from the board vendor; for
3862 instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard) 3857 instance, the TQM823L systems are available without (standard)
3863 or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features" 3858 or with LCD support. You can select such additional "features"
3864 when choosing the configuration, i. e. 3859 when choosing the configuration, i. e.
3865 3860
3866 make TQM823L_defconfig 3861 make TQM823L_defconfig
3867 - will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support 3862 - will configure for a plain TQM823L, i. e. no LCD support
3868 3863
3869 make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig 3864 make TQM823L_LCD_defconfig
3870 - will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD 3865 - will configure for a TQM823L with U-Boot console on LCD
3871 3866
3872 etc. 3867 etc.
3873 3868
3874 3869
3875 Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot 3870 Finally, type "make all", and you should get some working U-Boot
3876 images ready for download to / installation on your system: 3871 images ready for download to / installation on your system:
3877 3872
3878 - "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image 3873 - "u-boot.bin" is a raw binary image
3879 - "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format 3874 - "u-boot" is an image in ELF binary format
3880 - "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format 3875 - "u-boot.srec" is in Motorola S-Record format
3881 3876
3882 By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved 3877 By default the build is performed locally and the objects are saved
3883 in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change 3878 in the source directory. One of the two methods can be used to change
3884 this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory: 3879 this behavior and build U-Boot to some external directory:
3885 3880
3886 1. Add O= to the make command line invocations: 3881 1. Add O= to the make command line invocations:
3887 3882
3888 make O=/tmp/build distclean 3883 make O=/tmp/build distclean
3889 make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig 3884 make O=/tmp/build NAME_defconfig
3890 make O=/tmp/build all 3885 make O=/tmp/build all
3891 3886
3892 2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location: 3887 2. Set environment variable KBUILD_OUTPUT to point to the desired location:
3893 3888
3894 export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build 3889 export KBUILD_OUTPUT=/tmp/build
3895 make distclean 3890 make distclean
3896 make NAME_defconfig 3891 make NAME_defconfig
3897 make all 3892 make all
3898 3893
3899 Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment 3894 Note that the command line "O=" setting overrides the KBUILD_OUTPUT environment
3900 variable. 3895 variable.
3901 3896
3902 3897
3903 Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so 3898 Please be aware that the Makefiles assume you are using GNU make, so
3904 for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of 3899 for instance on NetBSD you might need to use "gmake" instead of
3905 native "make". 3900 native "make".
3906 3901
3907 3902
3908 If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need 3903 If the system board that you have is not listed, then you will need
3909 to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these 3904 to port U-Boot to your hardware platform. To do this, follow these
3910 steps: 3905 steps:
3911 3906
3912 1. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any 3907 1. Create a new directory to hold your board specific code. Add any
3913 files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least 3908 files you need. In your board directory, you will need at least
3914 the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c". 3909 the "Makefile" and a "<board>.c".
3915 2. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for 3910 2. Create a new configuration file "include/configs/<board>.h" for
3916 your board. 3911 your board.
3917 3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new 3912 3. If you're porting U-Boot to a new CPU, then also create a new
3918 directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need. 3913 directory to hold your CPU specific code. Add any files you need.
3919 4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name. 3914 4. Run "make <board>_defconfig" with your new name.
3920 5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file 3915 5. Type "make", and you should get a working "u-boot.srec" file
3921 to be installed on your target system. 3916 to be installed on your target system.
3922 6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise. 3917 6. Debug and solve any problems that might arise.
3923 [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.] 3918 [Of course, this last step is much harder than it sounds.]
3924 3919
3925 3920
3926 Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.: 3921 Testing of U-Boot Modifications, Ports to New Hardware, etc.:
3927 ============================================================== 3922 ==============================================================
3928 3923
3929 If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board 3924 If you have modified U-Boot sources (for instance added a new board
3930 or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to 3925 or support for new devices, a new CPU, etc.) you are expected to
3931 provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes 3926 provide feedback to the other developers. The feedback normally takes
3932 the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest 3927 the form of a "patch", i. e. a context diff against a certain (latest
3933 official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources. 3928 official or latest in the git repository) version of U-Boot sources.
3934 3929
3935 But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi- 3930 But before you submit such a patch, please verify that your modifi-
3936 cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of 3931 cation did not break existing code. At least make sure that *ALL* of
3937 the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so, 3932 the supported boards compile WITHOUT ANY compiler warnings. To do so,
3938 just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will 3933 just run the buildman script (tools/buildman/buildman), which will
3939 configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this 3934 configure and build U-Boot for ALL supported system. Be warned, this
3940 will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H' 3935 will take a while. Please see the buildman README, or run 'buildman -H'
3941 for documentation. 3936 for documentation.
3942 3937
3943 3938
3944 See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below. 3939 See also "U-Boot Porting Guide" below.
3945 3940
3946 3941
3947 Monitor Commands - Overview: 3942 Monitor Commands - Overview:
3948 ============================ 3943 ============================
3949 3944
3950 go - start application at address 'addr' 3945 go - start application at address 'addr'
3951 run - run commands in an environment variable 3946 run - run commands in an environment variable
3952 bootm - boot application image from memory 3947 bootm - boot application image from memory
3953 bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol 3948 bootp - boot image via network using BootP/TFTP protocol
3954 bootz - boot zImage from memory 3949 bootz - boot zImage from memory
3955 tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol 3950 tftpboot- boot image via network using TFTP protocol
3956 and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip" 3951 and env variables "ipaddr" and "serverip"
3957 (and eventually "gatewayip") 3952 (and eventually "gatewayip")
3958 tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol 3953 tftpput - upload a file via network using TFTP protocol
3959 rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol 3954 rarpboot- boot image via network using RARP/TFTP protocol
3960 diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd' 3955 diskboot- boot from IDE devicebootd - boot default, i.e., run 'bootcmd'
3961 loads - load S-Record file over serial line 3956 loads - load S-Record file over serial line
3962 loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode) 3957 loadb - load binary file over serial line (kermit mode)
3963 md - memory display 3958 md - memory display
3964 mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing) 3959 mm - memory modify (auto-incrementing)
3965 nm - memory modify (constant address) 3960 nm - memory modify (constant address)
3966 mw - memory write (fill) 3961 mw - memory write (fill)
3967 cp - memory copy 3962 cp - memory copy
3968 cmp - memory compare 3963 cmp - memory compare
3969 crc32 - checksum calculation 3964 crc32 - checksum calculation
3970 i2c - I2C sub-system 3965 i2c - I2C sub-system
3971 sspi - SPI utility commands 3966 sspi - SPI utility commands
3972 base - print or set address offset 3967 base - print or set address offset
3973 printenv- print environment variables 3968 printenv- print environment variables
3974 setenv - set environment variables 3969 setenv - set environment variables
3975 saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage 3970 saveenv - save environment variables to persistent storage
3976 protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection 3971 protect - enable or disable FLASH write protection
3977 erase - erase FLASH memory 3972 erase - erase FLASH memory
3978 flinfo - print FLASH memory information 3973 flinfo - print FLASH memory information
3979 nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand) 3974 nand - NAND memory operations (see doc/README.nand)
3980 bdinfo - print Board Info structure 3975 bdinfo - print Board Info structure
3981 iminfo - print header information for application image 3976 iminfo - print header information for application image
3982 coninfo - print console devices and informations 3977 coninfo - print console devices and informations
3983 ide - IDE sub-system 3978 ide - IDE sub-system
3984 loop - infinite loop on address range 3979 loop - infinite loop on address range
3985 loopw - infinite write loop on address range 3980 loopw - infinite write loop on address range
3986 mtest - simple RAM test 3981 mtest - simple RAM test
3987 icache - enable or disable instruction cache 3982 icache - enable or disable instruction cache
3988 dcache - enable or disable data cache 3983 dcache - enable or disable data cache
3989 reset - Perform RESET of the CPU 3984 reset - Perform RESET of the CPU
3990 echo - echo args to console 3985 echo - echo args to console
3991 version - print monitor version 3986 version - print monitor version
3992 help - print online help 3987 help - print online help
3993 ? - alias for 'help' 3988 ? - alias for 'help'
3994 3989
3995 3990
3996 Monitor Commands - Detailed Description: 3991 Monitor Commands - Detailed Description:
3997 ======================================== 3992 ========================================
3998 3993
3999 TODO. 3994 TODO.
4000 3995
4001 For now: just type "help <command>". 3996 For now: just type "help <command>".
4002 3997
4003 3998
4004 Environment Variables: 3999 Environment Variables:
4005 ====================== 4000 ======================
4006 4001
4007 U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which 4002 U-Boot supports user configuration using Environment Variables which
4008 can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory. 4003 can be made persistent by saving to Flash memory.
4009 4004
4010 Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using 4005 Environment Variables are set using "setenv", printed using
4011 "printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv" 4006 "printenv", and saved to Flash using "saveenv". Using "setenv"
4012 without a value can be used to delete a variable from the 4007 without a value can be used to delete a variable from the
4013 environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are 4008 environment. As long as you don't save the environment you are
4014 working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the 4009 working with an in-memory copy. In case the Flash area containing the
4015 environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided. 4010 environment is erased by accident, a default environment is provided.
4016 4011
4017 Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables. 4012 Some configuration options can be set using Environment Variables.
4018 4013
4019 List of environment variables (most likely not complete): 4014 List of environment variables (most likely not complete):
4020 4015
4021 baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE 4016 baudrate - see CONFIG_BAUDRATE
4022 4017
4023 bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY 4018 bootdelay - see CONFIG_BOOTDELAY
4024 4019
4025 bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND 4020 bootcmd - see CONFIG_BOOTCOMMAND
4026 4021
4027 bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image 4022 bootargs - Boot arguments when booting an RTOS image
4028 4023
4029 bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP 4024 bootfile - Name of the image to load with TFTP
4030 4025
4031 bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm 4026 bootm_low - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
4032 command can be restricted. This variable is given as 4027 command can be restricted. This variable is given as
4033 a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed 4028 a hexadecimal number and defines lowest address allowed
4034 for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size" 4029 for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_size"
4035 environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is 4030 environment variable. Address defined by "bootm_low" is
4036 also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux 4031 also the base of the initial memory mapping for the Linux
4037 kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and 4032 kernel -- see the description of CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ and
4038 bootm_mapsize. 4033 bootm_mapsize.
4039 4034
4040 bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel. 4035 bootm_mapsize - Size of the initial memory mapping for the Linux kernel.
4041 This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it 4036 This variable is given as a hexadecimal number and it
4042 defines the size of the memory region starting at base 4037 defines the size of the memory region starting at base
4043 address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel 4038 address bootm_low that is accessible by the Linux kernel
4044 during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used 4039 during early boot. If unset, CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ is used
4045 as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is 4040 as the default value if it is defined, and bootm_size is
4046 used otherwise. 4041 used otherwise.
4047 4042
4048 bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm 4043 bootm_size - Memory range available for image processing in the bootm
4049 command can be restricted. This variable is given as 4044 command can be restricted. This variable is given as
4050 a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region 4045 a hexadecimal number and defines the size of the region
4051 allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low" 4046 allowed for use by the bootm command. See also "bootm_low"
4052 environment variable. 4047 environment variable.
4053 4048
4054 updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used 4049 updatefile - Location of the software update file on a TFTP server, used
4055 by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to 4050 by the automatic software update feature. Please refer to
4056 documentation in doc/README.update for more details. 4051 documentation in doc/README.update for more details.
4057 4052
4058 autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'), 4053 autoload - if set to "no" (any string beginning with 'n'),
4059 "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the 4054 "bootp" will just load perform a lookup of the
4060 configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to 4055 configuration from the BOOTP server, but not try to
4061 load any image using TFTP 4056 load any image using TFTP
4062 4057
4063 autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp", 4058 autostart - if set to "yes", an image loaded using the "bootp",
4064 "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will 4059 "rarpboot", "tftpboot" or "diskboot" commands will
4065 be automatically started (by internally calling 4060 be automatically started (by internally calling
4066 "bootm") 4061 "bootm")
4067 4062
4068 If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the 4063 If set to "no", a standalone image passed to the
4069 "bootm" command will be copied to the load address 4064 "bootm" command will be copied to the load address
4070 (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started. 4065 (and eventually uncompressed), but NOT be started.
4071 This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary 4066 This can be used to load and uncompress arbitrary
4072 data. 4067 data.
4073 4068
4074 fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the 4069 fdt_high - if set this restricts the maximum address that the
4075 flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot. 4070 flattened device tree will be copied into upon boot.
4076 For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory 4071 For example, if you have a system with 1 GB memory
4077 at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel 4072 at physical address 0x10000000, while Linux kernel
4078 only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you 4073 only recognizes the first 704 MB as low memory, you
4079 may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the 4074 may need to set fdt_high as 0x3C000000 to have the
4080 device tree blob be copied to the maximum address 4075 device tree blob be copied to the maximum address
4081 of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can 4076 of the 704 MB low memory, so that Linux kernel can
4082 access it during the boot procedure. 4077 access it during the boot procedure.
4083 4078
4084 If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then 4079 If this is set to the special value 0xFFFFFFFF then
4085 the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this 4080 the fdt will not be copied at all on boot. For this
4086 to work it must reside in writable memory, have 4081 to work it must reside in writable memory, have
4087 sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to 4082 sufficient padding on the end of it for u-boot to
4088 add the information it needs into it, and the memory 4083 add the information it needs into it, and the memory
4089 must be accessible by the kernel. 4084 must be accessible by the kernel.
4090 4085
4091 fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened 4086 fdtcontroladdr- if set this is the address of the control flattened
4092 device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is 4087 device tree used by U-Boot when CONFIG_OF_CONTROL is
4093 defined. 4088 defined.
4094 4089
4095 i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only) 4090 i2cfast - (PPC405GP|PPC405EP only)
4096 if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast 4091 if set to 'y' configures Linux I2C driver for fast
4097 mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in 4092 mode (400kHZ). This environment variable is used in
4098 initialization code. So, for changes to be effective 4093 initialization code. So, for changes to be effective
4099 it must be saved and board must be reset. 4094 it must be saved and board must be reset.
4100 4095
4101 initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images: 4096 initrd_high - restrict positioning of initrd images:
4102 If this variable is not set, initrd images will be 4097 If this variable is not set, initrd images will be
4103 copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this 4098 copied to the highest possible address in RAM; this
4104 is usually what you want since it allows for 4099 is usually what you want since it allows for
4105 maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to 4100 maximum initrd size. If for some reason you want to
4106 make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the 4101 make sure that the initrd image is loaded below the
4107 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment 4102 CONFIG_SYS_BOOTMAPSZ limit, you can set this environment
4108 variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0". 4103 variable to a value of "no" or "off" or "0".
4109 Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper 4104 Alternatively, you can set it to a maximum upper
4110 address to use (U-Boot will still check that it 4105 address to use (U-Boot will still check that it
4111 does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data). 4106 does not overwrite the U-Boot stack and data).
4112 4107
4113 For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB 4108 For instance, when you have a system with 16 MB
4114 RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux, 4109 RAM, and want to reserve 4 MB from use by Linux,
4115 you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of 4110 you can do this by adding "mem=12M" to the value of
4116 the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make 4111 the "bootargs" variable. However, now you must make
4117 sure that the initrd image is placed in the first 4112 sure that the initrd image is placed in the first
4118 12 MB as well - this can be done with 4113 12 MB as well - this can be done with
4119 4114
4120 setenv initrd_high 00c00000 4115 setenv initrd_high 00c00000
4121 4116
4122 If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an 4117 If you set initrd_high to 0xFFFFFFFF, this is an
4123 indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal 4118 indication to U-Boot that all addresses are legal
4124 for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash 4119 for the Linux kernel, including addresses in flash
4125 memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the 4120 memory. In this case U-Boot will NOT COPY the
4126 ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the 4121 ramdisk at all. This may be useful to reduce the
4127 boot time on your system, but requires that this 4122 boot time on your system, but requires that this
4128 feature is supported by your Linux kernel. 4123 feature is supported by your Linux kernel.
4129 4124
4130 ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command 4125 ipaddr - IP address; needed for tftpboot command
4131 4126
4132 loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp", 4127 loadaddr - Default load address for commands like "bootp",
4133 "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot" 4128 "rarpboot", "tftpboot", "loadb" or "diskboot"
4134 4129
4135 loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO 4130 loads_echo - see CONFIG_LOADS_ECHO
4136 4131
4137 serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command 4132 serverip - TFTP server IP address; needed for tftpboot command
4138 4133
4139 bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME 4134 bootretry - see CONFIG_BOOT_RETRY_TIME
4140 4135
4141 bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR 4136 bootdelaykey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_DELAY_STR
4142 4137
4143 bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR 4138 bootstopkey - see CONFIG_AUTOBOOT_STOP_STR
4144 4139
4145 ethprime - controls which interface is used first. 4140 ethprime - controls which interface is used first.
4146 4141
4147 ethact - controls which interface is currently active. 4142 ethact - controls which interface is currently active.
4148 For example you can do the following 4143 For example you can do the following
4149 4144
4150 => setenv ethact FEC 4145 => setenv ethact FEC
4151 => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC 4146 => ping 192.168.0.1 # traffic sent on FEC
4152 => setenv ethact SCC 4147 => setenv ethact SCC
4153 => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC 4148 => ping 10.0.0.1 # traffic sent on SCC
4154 4149
4155 ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all 4150 ethrotate - When set to "no" U-Boot does not go through all
4156 available network interfaces. 4151 available network interfaces.
4157 It just stays at the currently selected interface. 4152 It just stays at the currently selected interface.
4158 4153
4159 netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will 4154 netretry - When set to "no" each network operation will
4160 either succeed or fail without retrying. 4155 either succeed or fail without retrying.
4161 When set to "once" the network operation will 4156 When set to "once" the network operation will
4162 fail when all the available network interfaces 4157 fail when all the available network interfaces
4163 are tried once without success. 4158 are tried once without success.
4164 Useful on scripts which control the retry operation 4159 Useful on scripts which control the retry operation
4165 themselves. 4160 themselves.
4166 4161
4167 npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode 4162 npe_ucode - set load address for the NPE microcode
4168 4163
4169 silent_linux - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by 4164 silent_linux - If set then Linux will be told to boot silently, by
4170 changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be 4165 changing the console to be empty. If "yes" it will be
4171 made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If 4166 made silent. If "no" it will not be made silent. If
4172 unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console 4167 unset, then it will be made silent if the U-Boot console
4173 is silent. 4168 is silent.
4174 4169
4175 tftpsrcp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's 4170 tftpsrcp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's
4176 UDP source port. 4171 UDP source port.
4177 4172
4178 tftpdstp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP 4173 tftpdstp - If this is set, the value is used for TFTP's UDP
4179 destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69. 4174 destination port instead of the Well Know Port 69.
4180 4175
4181 tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set, 4176 tftpblocksize - Block size to use for TFTP transfers; if not set,
4182 we use the TFTP server's default block size 4177 we use the TFTP server's default block size
4183 4178
4184 tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli- 4179 tftptimeout - Retransmission timeout for TFTP packets (in milli-
4185 seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines 4180 seconds, minimum value is 1000 = 1 second). Defines
4186 when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to 4181 when a packet is considered to be lost so it has to
4187 be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds. 4182 be retransmitted. The default is 5000 = 5 seconds.
4188 Lowering this value may make downloads succeed 4183 Lowering this value may make downloads succeed
4189 faster in networks with high packet loss rates or 4184 faster in networks with high packet loss rates or
4190 with unreliable TFTP servers. 4185 with unreliable TFTP servers.
4191 4186
4192 tftptimeoutcountmax - maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no 4187 tftptimeoutcountmax - maximum count of TFTP timeouts (no
4193 unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts 4188 unit, minimum value = 0). Defines how many timeouts
4194 can happen during a single file transfer before that 4189 can happen during a single file transfer before that
4195 transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means 4190 transfer is aborted. The default is 10, and 0 means
4196 'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help 4191 'no timeouts allowed'. Increasing this value may help
4197 downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with 4192 downloads succeed with high packet loss rates, or with
4198 unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware. 4193 unreliable TFTP servers or client hardware.
4199 4194
4200 vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over 4195 vlan - When set to a value < 4095 the traffic over
4201 Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q 4196 Ethernet is encapsulated/received over 802.1q
4202 VLAN tagged frames. 4197 VLAN tagged frames.
4203 4198
4204 bootpretryperiod - Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries. 4199 bootpretryperiod - Period during which BOOTP/DHCP sends retries.
4205 Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will 4200 Unsigned value, in milliseconds. If not set, the period will
4206 be either the default (28000), or a value based on 4201 be either the default (28000), or a value based on
4207 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has 4202 CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT, if defined. This value has
4208 precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT. 4203 precedence over the valu based on CONFIG_NET_RETRY_COUNT.
4209 4204
4210 The following image location variables contain the location of images 4205 The following image location variables contain the location of images
4211 used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is 4206 used in booting. The "Image" column gives the role of the image and is
4212 not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment 4207 not an environment variable name. The other columns are environment
4213 variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP 4208 variable names. "File Name" gives the name of the file on a TFTP
4214 server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be 4209 server, "RAM Address" gives the location in RAM the image will be
4215 loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR 4210 loaded to, and "Flash Location" gives the image's address in NOR
4216 flash or offset in NAND flash. 4211 flash or offset in NAND flash.
4217 4212
4218 *Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some 4213 *Note* - these variables don't have to be defined for all boards, some
4219 boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some 4214 boards currently use other variables for these purposes, and some
4220 boards use these variables for other purposes. 4215 boards use these variables for other purposes.
4221 4216
4222 Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location 4217 Image File Name RAM Address Flash Location
4223 ----- --------- ----------- -------------- 4218 ----- --------- ----------- --------------
4224 u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr 4219 u-boot u-boot u-boot_addr_r u-boot_addr
4225 Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr 4220 Linux kernel bootfile kernel_addr_r kernel_addr
4226 device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr 4221 device tree blob fdtfile fdt_addr_r fdt_addr
4227 ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr 4222 ramdisk ramdiskfile ramdisk_addr_r ramdisk_addr
4228 4223
4229 The following environment variables may be used and automatically 4224 The following environment variables may be used and automatically
4230 updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"), 4225 updated by the network boot commands ("bootp" and "rarpboot"),
4231 depending the information provided by your boot server: 4226 depending the information provided by your boot server:
4232 4227
4233 bootfile - see above 4228 bootfile - see above
4234 dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server 4229 dnsip - IP address of your Domain Name Server
4235 dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server 4230 dnsip2 - IP address of your secondary Domain Name Server
4236 gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use 4231 gatewayip - IP address of the Gateway (Router) to use
4237 hostname - Target hostname 4232 hostname - Target hostname
4238 ipaddr - see above 4233 ipaddr - see above
4239 netmask - Subnet Mask 4234 netmask - Subnet Mask
4240 rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server 4235 rootpath - Pathname of the root filesystem on the NFS server
4241 serverip - see above 4236 serverip - see above
4242 4237
4243 4238
4244 There are two special Environment Variables: 4239 There are two special Environment Variables:
4245 4240
4246 serial# - contains hardware identification information such 4241 serial# - contains hardware identification information such
4247 as type string and/or serial number 4242 as type string and/or serial number
4248 ethaddr - Ethernet address 4243 ethaddr - Ethernet address
4249 4244
4250 These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of 4245 These variables can be set only once (usually during manufacturing of
4251 the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables 4246 the board). U-Boot refuses to delete or overwrite these variables
4252 once they have been set once. 4247 once they have been set once.
4253 4248
4254 4249
4255 Further special Environment Variables: 4250 Further special Environment Variables:
4256 4251
4257 ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed 4252 ver - Contains the U-Boot version string as printed
4258 with the "version" command. This variable is 4253 with the "version" command. This variable is
4259 readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE). 4254 readonly (see CONFIG_VERSION_VARIABLE).
4260 4255
4261 4256
4262 Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take 4257 Please note that changes to some configuration parameters may take
4263 only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-). 4258 only effect after the next boot (yes, that's just like Windoze :-).
4264 4259
4265 4260
4266 Callback functions for environment variables: 4261 Callback functions for environment variables:
4267 --------------------------------------------- 4262 ---------------------------------------------
4268 4263
4269 For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change 4264 For some environment variables, the behavior of u-boot needs to change
4270 when their values are changed. This functionality allows functions to 4265 when their values are changed. This functionality allows functions to
4271 be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or 4266 be associated with arbitrary variables. On creation, overwrite, or
4272 deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side 4267 deletion, the callback will provide the opportunity for some side
4273 effect to happen or for the change to be rejected. 4268 effect to happen or for the change to be rejected.
4274 4269
4275 The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the 4270 The callbacks are named and associated with a function using the
4276 U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code. 4271 U_BOOT_ENV_CALLBACK macro in your board or driver code.
4277 4272
4278 These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The 4273 These callbacks are associated with variables in one of two ways. The
4279 static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC 4274 static list can be added to by defining CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_STATIC
4280 in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of 4275 in the board configuration to a string that defines a list of
4281 associations. The list must be in the following format: 4276 associations. The list must be in the following format:
4282 4277
4283 entry = variable_name[:callback_name] 4278 entry = variable_name[:callback_name]
4284 list = entry[,list] 4279 list = entry[,list]
4285 4280
4286 If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted. 4281 If the callback name is not specified, then the callback is deleted.
4287 Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list. 4282 Spaces are also allowed anywhere in the list.
4288 4283
4289 Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable 4284 Callbacks can also be associated by defining the ".callbacks" variable
4290 with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will 4285 with the same list format above. Any association in ".callbacks" will
4291 override any association in the static list. You can define 4286 override any association in the static list. You can define
4292 CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the 4287 CONFIG_ENV_CALLBACK_LIST_DEFAULT to a list (string) to define the
4293 ".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment. 4288 ".callbacks" environment variable in the default or embedded environment.
4294 4289
4295 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a 4290 If CONFIG_REGEX is defined, the variable_name above is evaluated as a
4296 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to 4291 regular expression. This allows multiple variables to be connected to
4297 the same callback without explicitly listing them all out. 4292 the same callback without explicitly listing them all out.
4298 4293
4299 4294
4300 Command Line Parsing: 4295 Command Line Parsing:
4301 ===================== 4296 =====================
4302 4297
4303 There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot: 4298 There are two different command line parsers available with U-Boot:
4304 the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell: 4299 the old "simple" one, and the much more powerful "hush" shell:
4305 4300
4306 Old, simple command line parser: 4301 Old, simple command line parser:
4307 -------------------------------- 4302 --------------------------------
4308 4303
4309 - supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands) 4304 - supports environment variables (through setenv / saveenv commands)
4310 - several commands on one line, separated by ';' 4305 - several commands on one line, separated by ';'
4311 - variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax 4306 - variable substitution using "... ${name} ..." syntax
4312 - special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\', 4307 - special characters ('$', ';') can be escaped by prefixing with '\',
4313 for example: 4308 for example:
4314 setenv bootcmd bootm \${address} 4309 setenv bootcmd bootm \${address}
4315 - You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example: 4310 - You can also escape text by enclosing in single apostrophes, for example:
4316 setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off' 4311 setenv addip 'setenv bootargs $bootargs ip=$ipaddr:$serverip:$gatewayip:$netmask:$hostname::off'
4317 4312
4318 Hush shell: 4313 Hush shell:
4319 ----------- 4314 -----------
4320 4315
4321 - similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like 4316 - similar to Bourne shell, with control structures like
4322 if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done, 4317 if...then...else...fi, for...do...done; while...do...done,
4323 until...do...done, ... 4318 until...do...done, ...
4324 - supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv 4319 - supports environment ("global") variables (through setenv / saveenv
4325 commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax 4320 commands) and local shell variables (through standard shell syntax
4326 "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run" 4321 "name=value"); only environment variables can be used with "run"
4327 command 4322 command
4328 4323
4329 General rules: 4324 General rules:
4330 -------------- 4325 --------------
4331 4326
4332 (1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run" 4327 (1) If a command line (or an environment variable executed by a "run"
4333 command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and 4328 command) contains several commands separated by semicolon, and
4334 one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be 4329 one of these commands fails, then the remaining commands will be
4335 executed anyway. 4330 executed anyway.
4336 4331
4337 (2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e. 4332 (2) If you execute several variables with one call to run (i. e.
4338 calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing 4333 calling run with a list of variables as arguments), any failing
4339 command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining 4334 command will cause "run" to terminate, i. e. the remaining
4340 variables are not executed. 4335 variables are not executed.
4341 4336
4342 Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces: 4337 Note for Redundant Ethernet Interfaces:
4343 ======================================= 4338 =======================================
4344 4339
4345 Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports 4340 Some boards come with redundant Ethernet interfaces; U-Boot supports
4346 such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a 4341 such configurations and is capable of automatic selection of a
4347 "working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows: 4342 "working" interface when needed. MAC assignment works as follows:
4348 4343
4349 Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding 4344 Network interfaces are numbered eth0, eth1, eth2, ... Corresponding
4350 MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0), 4345 MAC addresses can be stored in the environment as "ethaddr" (=>eth0),
4351 "eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ... 4346 "eth1addr" (=>eth1), "eth2addr", ...
4352 4347
4353 If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance 4348 If the network interface stores some valid MAC address (for instance
4354 in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon- 4349 in SROM), this is used as default address if there is NO correspon-
4355 ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment 4350 ding setting in the environment; if the corresponding environment
4356 variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means: 4351 variable is set, this overrides the settings in the card; that means:
4357 4352
4358 o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the 4353 o If the SROM has a valid MAC address, and there is no address in the
4359 environment, the SROM's address is used. 4354 environment, the SROM's address is used.
4360 4355
4361 o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the 4356 o If there is no valid address in the SROM, and a definition in the
4362 environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is 4357 environment exists, then the value from the environment variable is
4363 used. 4358 used.
4364 4359
4365 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and 4360 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and
4366 both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used. 4361 both addresses are the same, this MAC address is used.
4367 4362
4368 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the 4363 o If both the SROM and the environment contain a MAC address, and the
4369 addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a 4364 addresses differ, the value from the environment is used and a
4370 warning is printed. 4365 warning is printed.
4371 4366
4372 o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error 4367 o If neither SROM nor the environment contain a MAC address, an error
4373 is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case 4368 is raised. If CONFIG_NET_RANDOM_ETHADDR is defined, then in this case
4374 a random, locally-assigned MAC is used. 4369 a random, locally-assigned MAC is used.
4375 4370
4376 If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses 4371 If Ethernet drivers implement the 'write_hwaddr' function, valid MAC addresses
4377 will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This 4372 will be programmed into hardware as part of the initialization process. This
4378 may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable. 4373 may be skipped by setting the appropriate 'ethmacskip' environment variable.
4379 The naming convention is as follows: 4374 The naming convention is as follows:
4380 "ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc. 4375 "ethmacskip" (=>eth0), "eth1macskip" (=>eth1) etc.
4381 4376
4382 Image Formats: 4377 Image Formats:
4383 ============== 4378 ==============
4384 4379
4385 U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on) 4380 U-Boot is capable of booting (and performing other auxiliary operations on)
4386 images in two formats: 4381 images in two formats:
4387 4382
4388 New uImage format (FIT) 4383 New uImage format (FIT)
4389 ----------------------- 4384 -----------------------
4390 4385
4391 Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar 4386 Flexible and powerful format based on Flattened Image Tree -- FIT (similar
4392 to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple 4387 to Flattened Device Tree). It allows the use of images with multiple
4393 components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by 4388 components (several kernels, ramdisks, etc.), with contents protected by
4394 SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory. 4389 SHA1, MD5 or CRC32. More details are found in the doc/uImage.FIT directory.
4395 4390
4396 4391
4397 Old uImage format 4392 Old uImage format
4398 ----------------- 4393 -----------------
4399 4394
4400 Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything, 4395 Old image format is based on binary files which can be basically anything,
4401 preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for 4396 preceded by a special header; see the definitions in include/image.h for
4402 details; basically, the header defines the following image properties: 4397 details; basically, the header defines the following image properties:
4403 4398
4404 * Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD, 4399 * Target Operating System (Provisions for OpenBSD, NetBSD, FreeBSD,
4405 4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks, 4400 4.4BSD, Linux, SVR4, Esix, Solaris, Irix, SCO, Dell, NCR, VxWorks,
4406 LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY; 4401 LynxOS, pSOS, QNX, RTEMS, INTEGRITY;
4407 Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS, 4402 Currently supported: Linux, NetBSD, VxWorks, QNX, RTEMS, LynxOS,
4408 INTEGRITY). 4403 INTEGRITY).
4409 * Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86, 4404 * Target CPU Architecture (Provisions for Alpha, ARM, Intel x86,
4410 IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit; 4405 IA64, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC, IBM S390, SuperH, Sparc, Sparc 64 Bit;
4411 Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC). 4406 Currently supported: ARM, Intel x86, MIPS, NDS32, Nios II, PowerPC).
4412 * Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2) 4407 * Compression Type (uncompressed, gzip, bzip2)
4413 * Load Address 4408 * Load Address
4414 * Entry Point 4409 * Entry Point
4415 * Image Name 4410 * Image Name
4416 * Image Timestamp 4411 * Image Timestamp
4417 4412
4418 The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header 4413 The header is marked by a special Magic Number, and both the header
4419 and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by 4414 and the data portions of the image are secured against corruption by
4420 CRC32 checksums. 4415 CRC32 checksums.
4421 4416
4422 4417
4423 Linux Support: 4418 Linux Support:
4424 ============== 4419 ==============
4425 4420
4426 Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application 4421 Although U-Boot should support any OS or standalone application
4427 easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of 4422 easily, the main focus has always been on Linux during the design of
4428 U-Boot. 4423 U-Boot.
4429 4424
4430 U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some 4425 U-Boot includes many features that so far have been part of some
4431 special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any 4426 special "boot loader" code within the Linux kernel. Also, any
4432 "initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image; 4427 "initrd" images to be used are no longer part of one big Linux image;
4433 instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation 4428 instead, kernel and "initrd" are separate images. This implementation
4434 serves several purposes: 4429 serves several purposes:
4435 4430
4436 - the same features can be used for other OS or standalone 4431 - the same features can be used for other OS or standalone
4437 applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the 4432 applications (for instance: using compressed images to reduce the
4438 Flash memory footprint) 4433 Flash memory footprint)
4439 4434
4440 - it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because 4435 - it becomes much easier to port new Linux kernel versions because
4441 lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot 4436 lots of low-level, hardware dependent stuff are done by U-Boot
4442 4437
4443 - the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd" 4438 - the same Linux kernel image can now be used with different "initrd"
4444 images; of course this also means that different kernel images can 4439 images; of course this also means that different kernel images can
4445 be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't 4440 be run with the same "initrd". This makes testing easier (you don't
4446 have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just 4441 have to build a new "zImage.initrd" Linux image when you just
4447 change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the 4442 change a file in your "initrd"). Also, a field-upgrade of the
4448 software is easier now. 4443 software is easier now.
4449 4444
4450 4445
4451 Linux HOWTO: 4446 Linux HOWTO:
4452 ============ 4447 ============
4453 4448
4454 Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems: 4449 Porting Linux to U-Boot based systems:
4455 --------------------------------------- 4450 ---------------------------------------
4456 4451
4457 U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to 4452 U-Boot cannot save you from doing all the necessary modifications to
4458 configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware 4453 configure the Linux device drivers for use with your target hardware
4459 (no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to 4454 (no, we don't intend to provide a full virtual machine interface to
4460 Linux :-). 4455 Linux :-).
4461 4456
4462 But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot). 4457 But now you can ignore ALL boot loader code (in arch/powerpc/mbxboot).
4463 4458
4464 Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance 4459 Just make sure your machine specific header file (for instance
4465 include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board 4460 include/asm-ppc/tqm8xx.h) includes the same definition of the Board
4466 Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h, 4461 Information structure as we define in include/asm-<arch>/u-boot.h,
4467 and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value 4462 and make sure that your definition of IMAP_ADDR uses the same value
4468 as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR. 4463 as your U-Boot configuration in CONFIG_SYS_IMMR.
4469 4464
4470 Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers. 4465 Note that U-Boot now has a driver model, a unified model for drivers.
4471 If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there 4466 If you are adding a new driver, plumb it into driver model. If there
4472 is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See 4467 is no uclass available, you are encouraged to create one. See
4473 doc/driver-model. 4468 doc/driver-model.
4474 4469
4475 4470
4476 Configuring the Linux kernel: 4471 Configuring the Linux kernel:
4477 ----------------------------- 4472 -----------------------------
4478 4473
4479 No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root 4474 No specific requirements for U-Boot. Make sure you have some root
4480 device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system. 4475 device (initial ramdisk, NFS) for your target system.
4481 4476
4482 4477
4483 Building a Linux Image: 4478 Building a Linux Image:
4484 ----------------------- 4479 -----------------------
4485 4480
4486 With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are 4481 With U-Boot, "normal" build targets like "zImage" or "bzImage" are
4487 not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target 4482 not used. If you use recent kernel source, a new build target
4488 "uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by 4483 "uImage" will exist which automatically builds an image usable by
4489 U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target, 4484 U-Boot. Most older kernels also have support for a "pImage" target,
4490 which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a 4485 which was introduced for our predecessor project PPCBoot and uses a
4491 100% compatible format. 4486 100% compatible format.
4492 4487
4493 Example: 4488 Example:
4494 4489
4495 make TQM850L_defconfig 4490 make TQM850L_defconfig
4496 make oldconfig 4491 make oldconfig
4497 make dep 4492 make dep
4498 make uImage 4493 make uImage
4499 4494
4500 The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to 4495 The "uImage" build target uses a special tool (in 'tools/mkimage') to
4501 encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information, 4496 encapsulate a compressed Linux kernel image with header information,
4502 CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing: 4497 CRC32 checksum etc. for use with U-Boot. This is what we are doing:
4503 4498
4504 * build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format): 4499 * build a standard "vmlinux" kernel image (in ELF binary format):
4505 4500
4506 * convert the kernel into a raw binary image: 4501 * convert the kernel into a raw binary image:
4507 4502
4508 ${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \ 4503 ${CROSS_COMPILE}-objcopy -O binary \
4509 -R .note -R .comment \ 4504 -R .note -R .comment \
4510 -S vmlinux linux.bin 4505 -S vmlinux linux.bin
4511 4506
4512 * compress the binary image: 4507 * compress the binary image:
4513 4508
4514 gzip -9 linux.bin 4509 gzip -9 linux.bin
4515 4510
4516 * package compressed binary image for U-Boot: 4511 * package compressed binary image for U-Boot:
4517 4512
4518 mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \ 4513 mkimage -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip \
4519 -a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \ 4514 -a 0 -e 0 -n "Linux Kernel Image" \
4520 -d linux.bin.gz uImage 4515 -d linux.bin.gz uImage
4521 4516
4522 4517
4523 The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use 4518 The "mkimage" tool can also be used to create ramdisk images for use
4524 with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or 4519 with U-Boot, either separated from the Linux kernel image, or
4525 combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64 4520 combined into one file. "mkimage" encapsulates the images with a 64
4526 byte header containing information about target architecture, 4521 byte header containing information about target architecture,
4527 operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time 4522 operating system, image type, compression method, entry points, time
4528 stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc. 4523 stamp, CRC32 checksums, etc.
4529 4524
4530 "mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and 4525 "mkimage" can be called in two ways: to verify existing images and
4531 print the header information, or to build new images. 4526 print the header information, or to build new images.
4532 4527
4533 In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information 4528 In the first form (with "-l" option) mkimage lists the information
4534 contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes 4529 contained in the header of an existing U-Boot image; this includes
4535 checksum verification: 4530 checksum verification:
4536 4531
4537 tools/mkimage -l image 4532 tools/mkimage -l image
4538 -l ==> list image header information 4533 -l ==> list image header information
4539 4534
4540 The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image 4535 The second form (with "-d" option) is used to build a U-Boot image
4541 from a "data file" which is used as image payload: 4536 from a "data file" which is used as image payload:
4542 4537
4543 tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \ 4538 tools/mkimage -A arch -O os -T type -C comp -a addr -e ep \
4544 -n name -d data_file image 4539 -n name -d data_file image
4545 -A ==> set architecture to 'arch' 4540 -A ==> set architecture to 'arch'
4546 -O ==> set operating system to 'os' 4541 -O ==> set operating system to 'os'
4547 -T ==> set image type to 'type' 4542 -T ==> set image type to 'type'
4548 -C ==> set compression type 'comp' 4543 -C ==> set compression type 'comp'
4549 -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex) 4544 -a ==> set load address to 'addr' (hex)
4550 -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex) 4545 -e ==> set entry point to 'ep' (hex)
4551 -n ==> set image name to 'name' 4546 -n ==> set image name to 'name'
4552 -d ==> use image data from 'datafile' 4547 -d ==> use image data from 'datafile'
4553 4548
4554 Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load 4549 Right now, all Linux kernels for PowerPC systems use the same load
4555 address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the 4550 address (0x00000000), but the entry point address depends on the
4556 kernel version: 4551 kernel version:
4557 4552
4558 - 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C, 4553 - 2.2.x kernels have the entry point at 0x0000000C,
4559 - 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000. 4554 - 2.3.x and later kernels have the entry point at 0x00000000.
4560 4555
4561 So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read: 4556 So a typical call to build a U-Boot image would read:
4562 4557
4563 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ 4558 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
4564 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \ 4559 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C gzip -a 0 -e 0 \
4565 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \ 4560 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz \
4566 > examples/uImage.TQM850L 4561 > examples/uImage.TQM850L
4567 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L 4562 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
4568 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 4563 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
4569 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4564 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4570 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB 4565 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
4571 Load Address: 0x00000000 4566 Load Address: 0x00000000
4572 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4567 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4573 4568
4574 To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption): 4569 To verify the contents of the image (or check for corruption):
4575 4570
4576 -> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L 4571 -> tools/mkimage -l examples/uImage.TQM850L
4577 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L 4572 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
4578 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 4573 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
4579 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4574 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4580 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB 4575 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327.86 kB = 0.32 MB
4581 Load Address: 0x00000000 4576 Load Address: 0x00000000
4582 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4577 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4583 4578
4584 NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade 4579 NOTE: for embedded systems where boot time is critical you can trade
4585 speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this 4580 speed for memory and install an UNCOMPRESSED image instead: this
4586 needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not 4581 needs more space in Flash, but boots much faster since it does not
4587 need to be uncompressed: 4582 need to be uncompressed:
4588 4583
4589 -> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz 4584 -> gunzip /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux.gz
4590 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \ 4585 -> tools/mkimage -n '2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L' \
4591 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \ 4586 > -A ppc -O linux -T kernel -C none -a 0 -e 0 \
4592 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \ 4587 > -d /opt/elsk/ppc_8xx/usr/src/linux-2.4.4/arch/powerpc/coffboot/vmlinux \
4593 > examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed 4588 > examples/uImage.TQM850L-uncompressed
4594 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L 4589 Image Name: 2.4.4 kernel for TQM850L
4595 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000 4590 Created: Wed Jul 19 02:34:59 2000
4596 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed) 4591 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (uncompressed)
4597 Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB 4592 Data Size: 792160 Bytes = 773.59 kB = 0.76 MB
4598 Load Address: 0x00000000 4593 Load Address: 0x00000000
4599 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4594 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4600 4595
4601 4596
4602 Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file 4597 Similar you can build U-Boot images from a 'ramdisk.image.gz' file
4603 when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk: 4598 when your kernel is intended to use an initial ramdisk:
4604 4599
4605 -> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \ 4600 -> tools/mkimage -n 'Simple Ramdisk Image' \
4606 > -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \ 4601 > -A ppc -O linux -T ramdisk -C gzip \
4607 > -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd 4602 > -d /LinuxPPC/images/SIMPLE-ramdisk.image.gz examples/simple-initrd
4608 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image 4603 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
4609 Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000 4604 Created: Wed Jan 12 14:01:50 2000
4610 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) 4605 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
4611 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB 4606 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553.25 kB = 0.54 MB
4612 Load Address: 0x00000000 4607 Load Address: 0x00000000
4613 Entry Point: 0x00000000 4608 Entry Point: 0x00000000
4614 4609
4615 The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i" 4610 The "dumpimage" is a tool to disassemble images built by mkimage. Its "-i"
4616 option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d" 4611 option performs the converse operation of the mkimage's second form (the "-d"
4617 option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file" 4612 option). Given an image built by mkimage, the dumpimage extracts a "data file"
4618 from the image: 4613 from the image:
4619 4614
4620 tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file 4615 tools/dumpimage -i image -T type -p position data_file
4621 -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file' 4616 -i ==> extract from the 'image' a specific 'data_file'
4622 -T ==> set image type to 'type' 4617 -T ==> set image type to 'type'
4623 -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image' 4618 -p ==> 'position' (starting at 0) of the 'data_file' inside the 'image'
4624 4619
4625 4620
4626 Installing a Linux Image: 4621 Installing a Linux Image:
4627 ------------------------- 4622 -------------------------
4628 4623
4629 To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface, 4624 To downloading a U-Boot image over the serial (console) interface,
4630 you must convert the image to S-Record format: 4625 you must convert the image to S-Record format:
4631 4626
4632 objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec 4627 objcopy -I binary -O srec examples/image examples/image.srec
4633 4628
4634 The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot 4629 The 'objcopy' does not understand the information in the U-Boot
4635 image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to 4630 image header, so the resulting S-Record file will be relative to
4636 address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to 4631 address 0x00000000. To load it to a given address, you need to
4637 specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads' 4632 specify the target address as 'offset' parameter with the 'loads'
4638 command. 4633 command.
4639 4634
4640 Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the 4635 Example: install the image to address 0x40100000 (which on the
4641 TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank): 4636 TQM8xxL is in the first Flash bank):
4642 4637
4643 => erase 40100000 401FFFFF 4638 => erase 40100000 401FFFFF
4644 4639
4645 .......... done 4640 .......... done
4646 Erased 8 sectors 4641 Erased 8 sectors
4647 4642
4648 => loads 40100000 4643 => loads 40100000
4649 ## Ready for S-Record download ... 4644 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4650 ~>examples/image.srec 4645 ~>examples/image.srec
4651 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ... 4646 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...
4652 ... 4647 ...
4653 15989 15990 15991 15992 4648 15989 15990 15991 15992
4654 [file transfer complete] 4649 [file transfer complete]
4655 [connected] 4650 [connected]
4656 ## Start Addr = 0x00000000 4651 ## Start Addr = 0x00000000
4657 4652
4658 4653
4659 You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command; 4654 You can check the success of the download using the 'iminfo' command;
4660 this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data 4655 this includes a checksum verification so you can be sure no data
4661 corruption happened: 4656 corruption happened:
4662 4657
4663 => imi 40100000 4658 => imi 40100000
4664 4659
4665 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... 4660 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
4666 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L 4661 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
4667 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4662 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4668 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB 4663 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
4669 Load Address: 00000000 4664 Load Address: 00000000
4670 Entry Point: 0000000c 4665 Entry Point: 0000000c
4671 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4666 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4672 4667
4673 4668
4674 Boot Linux: 4669 Boot Linux:
4675 ----------- 4670 -----------
4676 4671
4677 The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in 4672 The "bootm" command is used to boot an application that is stored in
4678 memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents 4673 memory (RAM or Flash). In case of a Linux kernel image, the contents
4679 of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as 4674 of the "bootargs" environment variable is passed to the kernel as
4680 parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the 4675 parameters. You can check and modify this variable using the
4681 "printenv" and "setenv" commands: 4676 "printenv" and "setenv" commands:
4682 4677
4683 4678
4684 => printenv bootargs 4679 => printenv bootargs
4685 bootargs=root=/dev/ram 4680 bootargs=root=/dev/ram
4686 4681
4687 => setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 4682 => setenv bootargs root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
4688 4683
4689 => printenv bootargs 4684 => printenv bootargs
4690 bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 4685 bootargs=root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
4691 4686
4692 => bootm 40020000 4687 => bootm 40020000
4693 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ... 4688 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40020000 ...
4694 Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L 4689 Image Name: 2.2.13 for NFS on TQM850L
4695 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4690 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4696 Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB 4691 Data Size: 381681 Bytes = 372 kB = 0 MB
4697 Load Address: 00000000 4692 Load Address: 00000000
4698 Entry Point: 0000000c 4693 Entry Point: 0000000c
4699 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4694 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4700 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK 4695 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4701 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000 4696 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:35:17 MEST 2000
4702 Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2 4697 Boot arguments: root=/dev/nfs rw nfsroot=10.0.0.2:/LinuxPPC nfsaddrs=10.0.0.99:10.0.0.2
4703 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 4698 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
4704 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS 4699 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
4705 Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000] 4700 Memory: 15208k available (700k kernel code, 444k data, 32k init) [c0000000,c1000000]
4706 ... 4701 ...
4707 4702
4708 If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass 4703 If you want to boot a Linux kernel with initial RAM disk, you pass
4709 the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT 4704 the memory addresses of both the kernel and the initrd image (PPBCOOT
4710 format!) to the "bootm" command: 4705 format!) to the "bootm" command:
4711 4706
4712 => imi 40100000 40200000 4707 => imi 40100000 40200000
4713 4708
4714 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ... 4709 ## Checking Image at 40100000 ...
4715 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L 4710 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
4716 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4711 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4717 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB 4712 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
4718 Load Address: 00000000 4713 Load Address: 00000000
4719 Entry Point: 0000000c 4714 Entry Point: 0000000c
4720 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4715 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4721 4716
4722 ## Checking Image at 40200000 ... 4717 ## Checking Image at 40200000 ...
4723 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image 4718 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
4724 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) 4719 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
4725 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB 4720 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
4726 Load Address: 00000000 4721 Load Address: 00000000
4727 Entry Point: 00000000 4722 Entry Point: 00000000
4728 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4723 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4729 4724
4730 => bootm 40100000 40200000 4725 => bootm 40100000 40200000
4731 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ... 4726 ## Booting Linux kernel at 40100000 ...
4732 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L 4727 Image Name: 2.2.13 for initrd on TQM850L
4733 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4728 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4734 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB 4729 Data Size: 335725 Bytes = 327 kB = 0 MB
4735 Load Address: 00000000 4730 Load Address: 00000000
4736 Entry Point: 0000000c 4731 Entry Point: 0000000c
4737 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4732 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4738 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK 4733 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4739 ## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ... 4734 ## Loading RAMDisk Image at 40200000 ...
4740 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image 4735 Image Name: Simple Ramdisk Image
4741 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed) 4736 Image Type: PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image (gzip compressed)
4742 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB 4737 Data Size: 566530 Bytes = 553 kB = 0 MB
4743 Load Address: 00000000 4738 Load Address: 00000000
4744 Entry Point: 00000000 4739 Entry Point: 00000000
4745 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4740 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4746 Loading Ramdisk ... OK 4741 Loading Ramdisk ... OK
4747 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000 4742 Linux version 2.2.13 (wd@denx.local.net) (gcc version 2.95.2 19991024 (release)) #1 Wed Jul 19 02:32:08 MEST 2000
4748 Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram 4743 Boot arguments: root=/dev/ram
4749 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60 4744 time_init: decrementer frequency = 187500000/60
4750 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS 4745 Calibrating delay loop... 49.77 BogoMIPS
4751 ... 4746 ...
4752 RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0 4747 RAMDISK: Compressed image found at block 0
4753 VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem). 4748 VFS: Mounted root (ext2 filesystem).
4754 4749
4755 bash# 4750 bash#
4756 4751
4757 Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree: 4752 Boot Linux and pass a flat device tree:
4758 ----------- 4753 -----------
4759 4754
4760 First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section 4755 First, U-Boot must be compiled with the appropriate defines. See the section
4761 titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The 4756 titled "Linux Kernel Interface" above for a more in depth explanation. The
4762 following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated 4757 following is an example of how to start a kernel and pass an updated
4763 flat device tree: 4758 flat device tree:
4764 4759
4765 => print oftaddr 4760 => print oftaddr
4766 oftaddr=0x300000 4761 oftaddr=0x300000
4767 => print oft 4762 => print oft
4768 oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb 4763 oft=oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb
4769 => tftp $oftaddr $oft 4764 => tftp $oftaddr $oft
4770 Speed: 1000, full duplex 4765 Speed: 1000, full duplex
4771 Using TSEC0 device 4766 Using TSEC0 device
4772 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101 4767 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.101
4773 Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'. 4768 Filename 'oftrees/mpc8540ads.dtb'.
4774 Load address: 0x300000 4769 Load address: 0x300000
4775 Loading: # 4770 Loading: #
4776 done 4771 done
4777 Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex) 4772 Bytes transferred = 4106 (100a hex)
4778 => tftp $loadaddr $bootfile 4773 => tftp $loadaddr $bootfile
4779 Speed: 1000, full duplex 4774 Speed: 1000, full duplex
4780 Using TSEC0 device 4775 Using TSEC0 device
4781 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2 4776 TFTP from server 192.168.1.1; our IP address is 192.168.1.2
4782 Filename 'uImage'. 4777 Filename 'uImage'.
4783 Load address: 0x200000 4778 Load address: 0x200000
4784 Loading:############ 4779 Loading:############
4785 done 4780 done
4786 Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex) 4781 Bytes transferred = 1029407 (fb51f hex)
4787 => print loadaddr 4782 => print loadaddr
4788 loadaddr=200000 4783 loadaddr=200000
4789 => print oftaddr 4784 => print oftaddr
4790 oftaddr=0x300000 4785 oftaddr=0x300000
4791 => bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr 4786 => bootm $loadaddr - $oftaddr
4792 ## Booting image at 00200000 ... 4787 ## Booting image at 00200000 ...
4793 Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty 4788 Image Name: Linux-2.6.17-dirty
4794 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed) 4789 Image Type: PowerPC Linux Kernel Image (gzip compressed)
4795 Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB 4790 Data Size: 1029343 Bytes = 1005.2 kB
4796 Load Address: 00000000 4791 Load Address: 00000000
4797 Entry Point: 00000000 4792 Entry Point: 00000000
4798 Verifying Checksum ... OK 4793 Verifying Checksum ... OK
4799 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK 4794 Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
4800 Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000 4795 Booting using flat device tree at 0x300000
4801 Using MPC85xx ADS machine description 4796 Using MPC85xx ADS machine description
4802 Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb 4797 Memory CAM mapping: CAM0=256Mb, CAM1=256Mb, CAM2=0Mb residual: 0Mb
4803 [snip] 4798 [snip]
4804 4799
4805 4800
4806 More About U-Boot Image Types: 4801 More About U-Boot Image Types:
4807 ------------------------------ 4802 ------------------------------
4808 4803
4809 U-Boot supports the following image types: 4804 U-Boot supports the following image types:
4810 4805
4811 "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment 4806 "Standalone Programs" are directly runnable in the environment
4812 provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave 4807 provided by U-Boot; it is expected that (if they behave
4813 well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from 4808 well) you can continue to work in U-Boot after return from
4814 the Standalone Program. 4809 the Standalone Program.
4815 "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which 4810 "OS Kernel Images" are usually images of some Embedded OS which
4816 will take over control completely. Usually these programs 4811 will take over control completely. Usually these programs
4817 will install their own set of exception handlers, device 4812 will install their own set of exception handlers, device
4818 drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot 4813 drivers, set up the MMU, etc. - this means, that you cannot
4819 expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU. 4814 expect to re-enter U-Boot except by resetting the CPU.
4820 "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their 4815 "RAMDisk Images" are more or less just data blocks, and their
4821 parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is 4816 parameters (address, size) are passed to an OS kernel that is
4822 being started. 4817 being started.
4823 "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS 4818 "Multi-File Images" contain several images, typically an OS
4824 (Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like 4819 (Linux) kernel image and one or more data images like
4825 RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want 4820 RAMDisks. This construct is useful for instance when you want
4826 to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot 4821 to boot over the network using BOOTP etc., where the boot
4827 server provides just a single image file, but you want to get 4822 server provides just a single image file, but you want to get
4828 for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image. 4823 for instance an OS kernel and a RAMDisk image.
4829 4824
4830 "Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each 4825 "Multi-File Images" start with a list of image sizes, each
4831 image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network 4826 image size (in bytes) specified by an "uint32_t" in network
4832 byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0". 4827 byte order. This list is terminated by an "(uint32_t)0".
4833 Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by 4828 Immediately after the terminating 0 follow the images, one by
4834 one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to 4829 one, all aligned on "uint32_t" boundaries (size rounded up to
4835 a multiple of 4 bytes). 4830 a multiple of 4 bytes).
4836 4831
4837 "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like 4832 "Firmware Images" are binary images containing firmware (like
4838 U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to 4833 U-Boot or FPGA images) which usually will be programmed to
4839 flash memory. 4834 flash memory.
4840 4835
4841 "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by 4836 "Script files" are command sequences that will be executed by
4842 U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially 4837 U-Boot's command interpreter; this feature is especially
4843 useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush) 4838 useful when you configure U-Boot to use a real shell (hush)
4844 as command interpreter. 4839 as command interpreter.
4845 4840
4846 Booting the Linux zImage: 4841 Booting the Linux zImage:
4847 ------------------------- 4842 -------------------------
4848 4843
4849 On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done 4844 On some platforms, it's possible to boot Linux zImage. This is done
4850 using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same 4845 using the "bootz" command. The syntax of "bootz" command is the same
4851 as the syntax of "bootm" command. 4846 as the syntax of "bootm" command.
4852 4847
4853 Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply 4848 Note, defining the CONFIG_SUPPORT_RAW_INITRD allows user to supply
4854 kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the 4849 kernel with raw initrd images. The syntax is slightly different, the
4855 address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following 4850 address of the initrd must be augmented by it's size, in the following
4856 format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>". 4851 format: "<initrd addres>:<initrd size>".
4857 4852
4858 4853
4859 Standalone HOWTO: 4854 Standalone HOWTO:
4860 ================= 4855 =================
4861 4856
4862 One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and 4857 One of the features of U-Boot is that you can dynamically load and
4863 run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of 4858 run "standalone" applications, which can use some resources of
4864 U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services. 4859 U-Boot like console I/O functions or interrupt services.
4865 4860
4866 Two simple examples are included with the sources: 4861 Two simple examples are included with the sources:
4867 4862
4868 "Hello World" Demo: 4863 "Hello World" Demo:
4869 ------------------- 4864 -------------------
4870 4865
4871 'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo 4866 'examples/hello_world.c' contains a small "Hello World" Demo
4872 application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot. 4867 application; it is automatically compiled when you build U-Boot.
4873 It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it 4868 It's configured to run at address 0x00040004, so you can play with it
4874 like that: 4869 like that:
4875 4870
4876 => loads 4871 => loads
4877 ## Ready for S-Record download ... 4872 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4878 ~>examples/hello_world.srec 4873 ~>examples/hello_world.srec
4879 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... 4874 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
4880 [file transfer complete] 4875 [file transfer complete]
4881 [connected] 4876 [connected]
4882 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 4877 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004
4883 4878
4884 => go 40004 Hello World! This is a test. 4879 => go 40004 Hello World! This is a test.
4885 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... 4880 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
4886 Hello World 4881 Hello World
4887 argc = 7 4882 argc = 7
4888 argv[0] = "40004" 4883 argv[0] = "40004"
4889 argv[1] = "Hello" 4884 argv[1] = "Hello"
4890 argv[2] = "World!" 4885 argv[2] = "World!"
4891 argv[3] = "This" 4886 argv[3] = "This"
4892 argv[4] = "is" 4887 argv[4] = "is"
4893 argv[5] = "a" 4888 argv[5] = "a"
4894 argv[6] = "test." 4889 argv[6] = "test."
4895 argv[7] = "<NULL>" 4890 argv[7] = "<NULL>"
4896 Hit any key to exit ... 4891 Hit any key to exit ...
4897 4892
4898 ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 4893 ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
4899 4894
4900 Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt 4895 Another example, which demonstrates how to register a CPM interrupt
4901 handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'. 4896 handler with the U-Boot code, can be found in 'examples/timer.c'.
4902 Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second. 4897 Here, a CPM timer is set up to generate an interrupt every second.
4903 The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.' 4898 The interrupt service routine is trivial, just printing a '.'
4904 character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be 4899 character, but this is just a demo program. The application can be
4905 controlled by the following keys: 4900 controlled by the following keys:
4906 4901
4907 ? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers 4902 ? - print current values og the CPM Timer registers
4908 b - enable interrupts and start timer 4903 b - enable interrupts and start timer
4909 e - stop timer and disable interrupts 4904 e - stop timer and disable interrupts
4910 q - quit application 4905 q - quit application
4911 4906
4912 => loads 4907 => loads
4913 ## Ready for S-Record download ... 4908 ## Ready for S-Record download ...
4914 ~>examples/timer.srec 4909 ~>examples/timer.srec
4915 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ... 4910 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...
4916 [file transfer complete] 4911 [file transfer complete]
4917 [connected] 4912 [connected]
4918 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004 4913 ## Start Addr = 0x00040004
4919 4914
4920 => go 40004 4915 => go 40004
4921 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ... 4916 ## Starting application at 0x00040004 ...
4922 TIMERS=0xfff00980 4917 TIMERS=0xfff00980
4923 Using timer 1 4918 Using timer 1
4924 tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0 4919 tgcr @ 0xfff00980, tmr @ 0xfff00990, trr @ 0xfff00994, tcr @ 0xfff00998, tcn @ 0xfff0099c, ter @ 0xfff009b0
4925 4920
4926 Hit 'b': 4921 Hit 'b':
4927 [q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us 4922 [q, b, e, ?] Set interval 1000000 us
4928 Enabling timer 4923 Enabling timer
4929 Hit '?': 4924 Hit '?':
4930 [q, b, e, ?] ........ 4925 [q, b, e, ?] ........
4931 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0 4926 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0xef6, ter=0x0
4932 Hit '?': 4927 Hit '?':
4933 [q, b, e, ?] . 4928 [q, b, e, ?] .
4934 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0 4929 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x2ad4, ter=0x0
4935 Hit '?': 4930 Hit '?':
4936 [q, b, e, ?] . 4931 [q, b, e, ?] .
4937 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0 4932 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x1efc, ter=0x0
4938 Hit '?': 4933 Hit '?':
4939 [q, b, e, ?] . 4934 [q, b, e, ?] .
4940 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0 4935 tgcr=0x1, tmr=0xff1c, trr=0x3d09, tcr=0x0, tcn=0x169d, ter=0x0
4941 Hit 'e': 4936 Hit 'e':
4942 [q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer 4937 [q, b, e, ?] ...Stopping timer
4943 Hit 'q': 4938 Hit 'q':
4944 [q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0 4939 [q, b, e, ?] ## Application terminated, rc = 0x0
4945 4940
4946 4941
4947 Minicom warning: 4942 Minicom warning:
4948 ================ 4943 ================
4949 4944
4950 Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the 4945 Over time, many people have reported problems when trying to use the
4951 "minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd) 4946 "minicom" terminal emulation program for serial download. I (wd)
4952 consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under 4947 consider minicom to be broken, and recommend not to use it. Under
4953 Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and 4948 Unix, I recommend to use C-Kermit for general purpose use (and
4954 especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and 4949 especially for kermit binary protocol download ("loadb" command), and
4955 use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See 4950 use "cu" for S-Record download ("loads" command). See
4956 http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3. 4951 http://www.denx.de/wiki/view/DULG/SystemSetup#Section_4.3.
4957 for help with kermit. 4952 for help with kermit.
4958 4953
4959 4954
4960 Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this 4955 Nevertheless, if you absolutely want to use it try adding this
4961 configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section: 4956 configuration to your "File transfer protocols" section:
4962 4957
4963 Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi 4958 Name Program Name U/D FullScr IO-Red. Multi
4964 X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N 4959 X kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -s Y U Y N N
4965 Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N 4960 Y kermit /usr/bin/kermit -i -l %l -r N D Y N N
4966 4961
4967 4962
4968 NetBSD Notes: 4963 NetBSD Notes:
4969 ============= 4964 =============
4970 4965
4971 Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host 4966 Starting at version 0.9.2, U-Boot supports NetBSD both as host
4972 (build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx). 4967 (build U-Boot) and target system (boots NetBSD/mpc8xx).
4973 4968
4974 Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on 4969 Building requires a cross environment; it is known to work on
4975 NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also 4970 NetBSD/i386 with the cross-powerpc-netbsd-1.3 package (you will also
4976 need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make). 4971 need gmake since the Makefiles are not compatible with BSD make).
4977 Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files; 4972 Note that the cross-powerpc package does not install include files;
4978 attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is 4973 attempting to build U-Boot will fail because <machine/ansi.h> is
4979 missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually: 4974 missing. This file has to be installed and patched manually:
4980 4975
4981 # cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include 4976 # cd /usr/pkg/cross/powerpc-netbsd/include
4982 # mkdir powerpc 4977 # mkdir powerpc
4983 # ln -s powerpc machine 4978 # ln -s powerpc machine
4984 # cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h 4979 # cp /usr/src/sys/arch/powerpc/include/ansi.h powerpc/ansi.h
4985 # ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST 4980 # ${EDIT} powerpc/ansi.h ## must remove __va_list, _BSD_VA_LIST
4986 4981
4987 Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native 4982 Native builds *don't* work due to incompatibilities between native
4988 and U-Boot include files. 4983 and U-Boot include files.
4989 4984
4990 Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a 4985 Booting assumes that (the first part of) the image booted is a
4991 stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel 4986 stage-2 loader which in turn loads and then invokes the kernel
4992 proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source 4987 proper. Loader sources will eventually appear in the NetBSD source
4993 tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the 4988 tree (probably in sys/arc/mpc8xx/stand/u-boot_stage2/); in the
4994 meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz 4989 meantime, see ftp://ftp.denx.de/pub/u-boot/ppcboot_stage2.tar.gz
4995 4990
4996 4991
4997 Implementation Internals: 4992 Implementation Internals:
4998 ========================= 4993 =========================
4999 4994
5000 The following is not intended to be a complete description of every 4995 The following is not intended to be a complete description of every
5001 implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the 4996 implementation detail. However, it should help to understand the
5002 inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom 4997 inner workings of U-Boot and make it easier to port it to custom
5003 hardware. 4998 hardware.
5004 4999
5005 5000
5006 Initial Stack, Global Data: 5001 Initial Stack, Global Data:
5007 --------------------------- 5002 ---------------------------
5008 5003
5009 The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot 5004 The implementation of U-Boot is complicated by the fact that U-Boot
5010 starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to 5005 starts running out of ROM (flash memory), usually without access to
5011 system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet). 5006 system RAM (because the memory controller is not initialized yet).
5012 This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS 5007 This means that we don't have writable Data or BSS segments, and BSS
5013 is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working 5008 is not initialized as zero. To be able to get a C environment working
5014 at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation 5009 at all, we have to allocate at least a minimal stack. Implementation
5015 options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU 5010 options for this are defined and restricted by the CPU used: Some CPU
5016 models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and 5011 models provide on-chip memory (like the IMMR area on MPC8xx and
5017 MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be 5012 MPC826x processors), on others (parts of) the data cache can be
5018 locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc. 5013 locked as (mis-) used as memory, etc.
5019 5014
5020 Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the 5015 Chris Hallinan posted a good summary of these issues to the
5021 U-Boot mailing list: 5016 U-Boot mailing list:
5022 5017
5023 Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)? 5018 Subject: RE: [U-Boot-Users] RE: More On Memory Bank x (nothingness)?
5024 From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com> 5019 From: "Chris Hallinan" <clh@net1plus.com>
5025 Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET) 5020 Date: Mon, 10 Feb 2003 16:43:46 -0500 (22:43 MET)
5026 ... 5021 ...
5027 5022
5028 Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it 5023 Correct me if I'm wrong, folks, but the way I understand it
5029 is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not 5024 is this: Using DCACHE as initial RAM for Stack, etc, does not
5030 require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness 5025 require any physical RAM backing up the cache. The cleverness
5031 is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of 5026 is that the cache is being used as a temporary supply of
5032 necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's 5027 necessary storage before the SDRAM controller is setup. It's
5033 beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you 5028 beyond the scope of this list to explain the details, but you
5034 can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and 5029 can see how this works by studying the cache architecture and
5035 operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals. 5030 operation in the architecture and processor-specific manuals.
5036 5031
5037 OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It 5032 OCM is On Chip Memory, which I believe the 405GP has 4K. It
5038 is another option for the system designer to use as an 5033 is another option for the system designer to use as an
5039 initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either 5034 initial stack/RAM area prior to SDRAM being available. Either
5040 option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your 5035 option should work for you. Using CS 4 should be fine if your
5041 board designers haven't used it for something that would 5036 board designers haven't used it for something that would
5042 cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not 5037 cause you grief during the initial boot! It is frequently not
5043 used. 5038 used.
5044 5039
5045 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere 5040 CONFIG_SYS_INIT_RAM_ADDR should be somewhere that won't interfere
5046 with your processor/board/system design. The default value 5041 with your processor/board/system design. The default value
5047 you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in 5042 you will find in any recent u-boot distribution in
5048 walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger 5043 walnut.h should work for you. I'd set it to a value larger
5049 than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set 5044 than your SDRAM module. If you have a 64MB SDRAM module, set
5050 it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources 5045 it above 400_0000. Just make sure your board has no resources
5051 that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in 5046 that are supposed to respond to that address! That code in
5052 start.S has been around a while and should work as is when 5047 start.S has been around a while and should work as is when
5053 you get the config right. 5048 you get the config right.
5054 5049
5055 -Chris Hallinan 5050 -Chris Hallinan
5056 DS4.COM, Inc. 5051 DS4.COM, Inc.
5057 5052
5058 It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C 5053 It is essential to remember this, since it has some impact on the C
5059 code for the initialization procedures: 5054 code for the initialization procedures:
5060 5055
5061 * Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt 5056 * Initialized global data (data segment) is read-only. Do not attempt
5062 to write it. 5057 to write it.
5063 5058
5064 * Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized 5059 * Do not use any uninitialized global data (or implicitly initialized
5065 as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali- 5060 as zero data - BSS segment) at all - this is undefined, initiali-
5066 zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM). 5061 zation is performed later (when relocating to RAM).
5067 5062
5068 * Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like 5063 * Stack space is very limited. Avoid big data buffers or things like
5069 that. 5064 that.
5070 5065
5071 Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use 5066 Having only the stack as writable memory limits means we cannot use
5072 normal global data to share information between the code. But it 5067 normal global data to share information between the code. But it
5073 turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly 5068 turned out that the implementation of U-Boot can be greatly
5074 simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all 5069 simplified by making a global data structure (gd_t) available to all
5075 functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_ 5070 functions. We could pass a pointer to this data as argument to _all_
5076 functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of 5071 functions, but this would bloat the code. Instead we use a feature of
5077 the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we 5072 the GCC compiler (Global Register Variables) to share the data: we
5078 place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we 5073 place a pointer (gd) to the global data into a register which we
5079 reserve for this purpose. 5074 reserve for this purpose.
5080 5075
5081 When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the 5076 When choosing a register for such a purpose we are restricted by the
5082 relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by 5077 relevant (E)ABI specifications for the current architecture, and by
5083 GCC's implementation. 5078 GCC's implementation.
5084 5079
5085 For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use: 5080 For PowerPC, the following registers have specific use:
5086 R1: stack pointer 5081 R1: stack pointer
5087 R2: reserved for system use 5082 R2: reserved for system use
5088 R3-R4: parameter passing and return values 5083 R3-R4: parameter passing and return values
5089 R5-R10: parameter passing 5084 R5-R10: parameter passing
5090 R13: small data area pointer 5085 R13: small data area pointer
5091 R30: GOT pointer 5086 R30: GOT pointer
5092 R31: frame pointer 5087 R31: frame pointer
5093 5088
5094 (U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12 5089 (U-Boot also uses R12 as internal GOT pointer. r12
5095 is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when 5090 is a volatile register so r12 needs to be reset when
5096 going back and forth between asm and C) 5091 going back and forth between asm and C)
5097 5092
5098 ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data 5093 ==> U-Boot will use R2 to hold a pointer to the global data
5099 5094
5100 Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the 5095 Note: on PPC, we could use a static initializer (since the
5101 address of the global data structure is known at compile time), 5096 address of the global data structure is known at compile time),
5102 but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat 5097 but it turned out that reserving a register results in somewhat
5103 smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on 5098 smaller code - although the code savings are not that big (on
5104 average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image, 5099 average for all boards 752 bytes for the whole U-Boot image,
5105 624 text + 127 data). 5100 624 text + 127 data).
5106 5101
5107 On ARM, the following registers are used: 5102 On ARM, the following registers are used:
5108 5103
5109 R0: function argument word/integer result 5104 R0: function argument word/integer result
5110 R1-R3: function argument word 5105 R1-R3: function argument word
5111 R9: platform specific 5106 R9: platform specific
5112 R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled) 5107 R10: stack limit (used only if stack checking is enabled)
5113 R11: argument (frame) pointer 5108 R11: argument (frame) pointer
5114 R12: temporary workspace 5109 R12: temporary workspace
5115 R13: stack pointer 5110 R13: stack pointer
5116 R14: link register 5111 R14: link register
5117 R15: program counter 5112 R15: program counter
5118 5113
5119 ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data 5114 ==> U-Boot will use R9 to hold a pointer to the global data
5120 5115
5121 Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported. 5116 Note: on ARM, only R_ARM_RELATIVE relocations are supported.
5122 5117
5123 On Nios II, the ABI is documented here: 5118 On Nios II, the ABI is documented here:
5124 http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf 5119 http://www.altera.com/literature/hb/nios2/n2cpu_nii51016.pdf
5125 5120
5126 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data 5121 ==> U-Boot will use gp to hold a pointer to the global data
5127 5122
5128 Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp 5123 Note: on Nios II, we give "-G0" option to gcc and don't use gp
5129 to access small data sections, so gp is free. 5124 to access small data sections, so gp is free.
5130 5125
5131 On NDS32, the following registers are used: 5126 On NDS32, the following registers are used:
5132 5127
5133 R0-R1: argument/return 5128 R0-R1: argument/return
5134 R2-R5: argument 5129 R2-R5: argument
5135 R15: temporary register for assembler 5130 R15: temporary register for assembler
5136 R16: trampoline register 5131 R16: trampoline register
5137 R28: frame pointer (FP) 5132 R28: frame pointer (FP)
5138 R29: global pointer (GP) 5133 R29: global pointer (GP)
5139 R30: link register (LP) 5134 R30: link register (LP)
5140 R31: stack pointer (SP) 5135 R31: stack pointer (SP)
5141 PC: program counter (PC) 5136 PC: program counter (PC)
5142 5137
5143 ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data 5138 ==> U-Boot will use R10 to hold a pointer to the global data
5144 5139
5145 NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope, 5140 NOTE: DECLARE_GLOBAL_DATA_PTR must be used with file-global scope,
5146 or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much. 5141 or current versions of GCC may "optimize" the code too much.
5147 5142
5148 Memory Management: 5143 Memory Management:
5149 ------------------ 5144 ------------------
5150 5145
5151 U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the 5146 U-Boot runs in system state and uses physical addresses, i.e. the
5152 MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection. 5147 MMU is not used either for address mapping nor for memory protection.
5153 5148
5154 The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory 5149 The available memory is mapped to fixed addresses using the memory
5155 controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each 5150 controller. In this process, a contiguous block is formed for each
5156 memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several 5151 memory type (Flash, SDRAM, SRAM), even when it consists of several
5157 physical memory banks. 5152 physical memory banks.
5158 5153
5159 U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on 5154 U-Boot is installed in the first 128 kB of the first Flash bank (on
5160 TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After 5155 TQM8xxL modules this is the range 0x40000000 ... 0x4001FFFF). After
5161 booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself 5156 booting and sizing and initializing DRAM, the code relocates itself
5162 to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some 5157 to the upper end of DRAM. Immediately below the U-Boot code some
5163 memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN 5158 memory is reserved for use by malloc() [see CONFIG_SYS_MALLOC_LEN
5164 configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board 5159 configuration setting]. Below that, a structure with global Board
5165 Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward). 5160 Info data is placed, followed by the stack (growing downward).
5166 5161
5167 Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB 5162 Additionally, some exception handler code is copied to the low 8 kB
5168 of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF). 5163 of DRAM (0x00000000 ... 0x00001FFF).
5169 5164
5170 So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like 5165 So a typical memory configuration with 16 MB of DRAM could look like
5171 this: 5166 this:
5172 5167
5173 0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code 5168 0x0000 0000 Exception Vector code
5174 : 5169 :
5175 0x0000 1FFF 5170 0x0000 1FFF
5176 0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use 5171 0x0000 2000 Free for Application Use
5177 : 5172 :
5178 : 5173 :
5179 5174
5180 : 5175 :
5181 : 5176 :
5182 0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward) 5177 0x00FB FF20 Monitor Stack (Growing downward)
5183 0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data 5178 0x00FB FFAC Board Info Data and permanent copy of global data
5184 0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena 5179 0x00FC 0000 Malloc Arena
5185 : 5180 :
5186 0x00FD FFFF 5181 0x00FD FFFF
5187 0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code 5182 0x00FE 0000 RAM Copy of Monitor Code
5188 ... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer 5183 ... eventually: LCD or video framebuffer
5189 ... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset) 5184 ... eventually: pRAM (Protected RAM - unchanged by reset)
5190 0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM] 5185 0x00FF FFFF [End of RAM]
5191 5186
5192 5187
5193 System Initialization: 5188 System Initialization:
5194 ---------------------- 5189 ----------------------
5195 5190
5196 In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point 5191 In the reset configuration, U-Boot starts at the reset entry point
5197 (on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset 5192 (on most PowerPC systems at address 0x00000100). Because of the reset
5198 configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory. 5193 configuration for CS0# this is a mirror of the on board Flash memory.
5199 To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address. 5194 To be able to re-map memory U-Boot then jumps to its link address.
5200 To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!) 5195 To be able to implement the initialization code in C, a (small!)
5201 initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs 5196 initial stack is set up in the internal Dual Ported RAM (in case CPUs
5202 which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data 5197 which provide such a feature like), or in a locked part of the data
5203 cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and 5198 cache. After that, U-Boot initializes the CPU core, the caches and
5204 the SIU. 5199 the SIU.
5205 5200
5206 Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a 5201 Next, all (potentially) available memory banks are mapped using a
5207 preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries 5202 preliminary mapping. For example, we put them on 512 MB boundaries
5208 (multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash 5203 (multiples of 0x20000000: SDRAM on 0x00000000 and 0x20000000, Flash
5209 on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is 5204 on 0x40000000 and 0x60000000, SRAM on 0x80000000). Then UPM A is
5210 programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a 5205 programmed for SDRAM access. Using the temporary configuration, a
5211 simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM 5206 simple memory test is run that determines the size of the SDRAM
5212 banks. 5207 banks.
5213 5208
5214 When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of 5209 When there is more than one SDRAM bank, and the banks are of
5215 different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first 5210 different size, the largest is mapped first. For equal size, the first
5216 bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address 5211 bank (CS2#) is mapped first. The first mapping is always for address
5217 0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create 5212 0x00000000, with any additional banks following immediately to create
5218 contiguous memory starting from 0. 5213 contiguous memory starting from 0.
5219 5214
5220 Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area 5215 Then, the monitor installs itself at the upper end of the SDRAM area
5221 and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board 5216 and allocates memory for use by malloc() and for the global Board
5222 Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM 5217 Info data; also, the exception vector code is copied to the low RAM
5223 pages, and the final stack is set up. 5218 pages, and the final stack is set up.
5224 5219
5225 Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment; 5220 Only after this relocation will you have a "normal" C environment;
5226 until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are 5221 until that you are restricted in several ways, mostly because you are
5227 running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a 5222 running from ROM, and because the code will have to be relocated to a
5228 new address in RAM. 5223 new address in RAM.
5229 5224
5230 5225
5231 U-Boot Porting Guide: 5226 U-Boot Porting Guide:
5232 ---------------------- 5227 ----------------------
5233 5228
5234 [Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing 5229 [Based on messages by Jerry Van Baren in the U-Boot-Users mailing
5235 list, October 2002] 5230 list, October 2002]
5236 5231
5237 5232
5238 int main(int argc, char *argv[]) 5233 int main(int argc, char *argv[])
5239 { 5234 {
5240 sighandler_t no_more_time; 5235 sighandler_t no_more_time;
5241 5236
5242 signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time); 5237 signal(SIGALRM, no_more_time);
5243 alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK)); 5238 alarm(PROJECT_DEADLINE - toSec (3 * WEEK));
5244 5239
5245 if (available_money > available_manpower) { 5240 if (available_money > available_manpower) {
5246 Pay consultant to port U-Boot; 5241 Pay consultant to port U-Boot;
5247 return 0; 5242 return 0;
5248 } 5243 }
5249 5244
5250 Download latest U-Boot source; 5245 Download latest U-Boot source;
5251 5246
5252 Subscribe to u-boot mailing list; 5247 Subscribe to u-boot mailing list;
5253 5248
5254 if (clueless) 5249 if (clueless)
5255 email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?"); 5250 email("Hi, I am new to U-Boot, how do I get started?");
5256 5251
5257 while (learning) { 5252 while (learning) {
5258 Read the README file in the top level directory; 5253 Read the README file in the top level directory;
5259 Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual; 5254 Read http://www.denx.de/twiki/bin/view/DULG/Manual;
5260 Read applicable doc/*.README; 5255 Read applicable doc/*.README;
5261 Read the source, Luke; 5256 Read the source, Luke;
5262 /* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */ 5257 /* find . -name "*.[chS]" | xargs grep -i <keyword> */
5263 } 5258 }
5264 5259
5265 if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500)) 5260 if (available_money > toLocalCurrency ($2500))
5266 Buy a BDI3000; 5261 Buy a BDI3000;
5267 else 5262 else
5268 Add a lot of aggravation and time; 5263 Add a lot of aggravation and time;
5269 5264
5270 if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */ 5265 if (a similar board exists) { /* hopefully... */
5271 cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard> 5266 cp -a board/<similar> board/<myboard>
5272 cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h 5267 cp include/configs/<similar>.h include/configs/<myboard>.h
5273 } else { 5268 } else {
5274 Create your own board support subdirectory; 5269 Create your own board support subdirectory;
5275 Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file; 5270 Create your own board include/configs/<myboard>.h file;
5276 } 5271 }
5277 Edit new board/<myboard> files 5272 Edit new board/<myboard> files
5278 Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h 5273 Edit new include/configs/<myboard>.h
5279 5274
5280 while (!accepted) { 5275 while (!accepted) {
5281 while (!running) { 5276 while (!running) {
5282 do { 5277 do {
5283 Add / modify source code; 5278 Add / modify source code;
5284 } until (compiles); 5279 } until (compiles);
5285 Debug; 5280 Debug;
5286 if (clueless) 5281 if (clueless)
5287 email("Hi, I am having problems..."); 5282 email("Hi, I am having problems...");
5288 } 5283 }
5289 Send patch file to the U-Boot email list; 5284 Send patch file to the U-Boot email list;
5290 if (reasonable critiques) 5285 if (reasonable critiques)
5291 Incorporate improvements from email list code review; 5286 Incorporate improvements from email list code review;
5292 else 5287 else
5293 Defend code as written; 5288 Defend code as written;
5294 } 5289 }
5295 5290
5296 return 0; 5291 return 0;
5297 } 5292 }
5298 5293
5299 void no_more_time (int sig) 5294 void no_more_time (int sig)
5300 { 5295 {
5301 hire_a_guru(); 5296 hire_a_guru();
5302 } 5297 }
5303 5298
5304 5299
5305 Coding Standards: 5300 Coding Standards:
5306 ----------------- 5301 -----------------
5307 5302
5308 All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel 5303 All contributions to U-Boot should conform to the Linux kernel
5309 coding style; see the file "Documentation/CodingStyle" and the script 5304 coding style; see the file "Documentation/CodingStyle" and the script
5310 "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory. 5305 "scripts/Lindent" in your Linux kernel source directory.
5311 5306
5312 Source files originating from a different project (for example the 5307 Source files originating from a different project (for example the
5313 MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not 5308 MTD subsystem) are generally exempt from these guidelines and are not
5314 reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those 5309 reformatted to ease subsequent migration to newer versions of those
5315 sources. 5310 sources.
5316 5311
5317 Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in 5312 Please note that U-Boot is implemented in C (and to some small parts in
5318 Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//) 5313 Assembler); no C++ is used, so please do not use C++ style comments (//)
5319 in your code. 5314 in your code.
5320 5315
5321 Please also stick to the following formatting rules: 5316 Please also stick to the following formatting rules:
5322 - remove any trailing white space 5317 - remove any trailing white space
5323 - use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces 5318 - use TAB characters for indentation and vertical alignment, not spaces
5324 - make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds 5319 - make sure NOT to use DOS '\r\n' line feeds
5325 - do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files 5320 - do not add more than 2 consecutive empty lines to source files
5326 - do not add trailing empty lines to source files 5321 - do not add trailing empty lines to source files
5327 5322
5328 Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned 5323 Submissions which do not conform to the standards may be returned
5329 with a request to reformat the changes. 5324 with a request to reformat the changes.
5330 5325
5331 5326
5332 Submitting Patches: 5327 Submitting Patches:
5333 ------------------- 5328 -------------------
5334 5329
5335 Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to 5330 Since the number of patches for U-Boot is growing, we need to
5336 establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules 5331 establish some rules. Submissions which do not conform to these rules
5337 may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff. 5332 may be rejected, even when they contain important and valuable stuff.
5338 5333
5339 Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details. 5334 Please see http://www.denx.de/wiki/U-Boot/Patches for details.
5340 5335
5341 Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>; 5336 Patches shall be sent to the u-boot mailing list <u-boot@lists.denx.de>;
5342 see http://lists.denx.de/mailman/listinfo/u-boot 5337 see http://lists.denx.de/mailman/listinfo/u-boot
5343 5338
5344 When you send a patch, please include the following information with 5339 When you send a patch, please include the following information with
5345 it: 5340 it:
5346 5341
5347 * For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes 5342 * For bug fixes: a description of the bug and how your patch fixes
5348 this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the 5343 this bug. Please try to include a way of demonstrating that the
5349 patch actually fixes something. 5344 patch actually fixes something.
5350 5345
5351 * For new features: a description of the feature and your 5346 * For new features: a description of the feature and your
5352 implementation. 5347 implementation.
5353 5348
5354 * A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch) 5349 * A CHANGELOG entry as plaintext (separate from the patch)
5355 5350
5356 * For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your 5351 * For major contributions, add a MAINTAINERS file with your
5357 information and associated file and directory references. 5352 information and associated file and directory references.
5358 5353
5359 * When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a 5354 * When you add support for a new board, don't forget to add a
5360 maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too. 5355 maintainer e-mail address to the boards.cfg file, too.
5361 5356
5362 * If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to 5357 * If your patch adds new configuration options, don't forget to
5363 document these in the README file. 5358 document these in the README file.
5364 5359
5365 * The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly* 5360 * The patch itself. If you are using git (which is *strongly*
5366 recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the 5361 recommended) you can easily generate the patch using the
5367 "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to 5362 "git format-patch". If you then use "git send-email" to send it to
5368 the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems 5363 the U-Boot mailing list, you will avoid most of the common problems
5369 with some other mail clients. 5364 with some other mail clients.
5370 5365
5371 If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of 5366 If you cannot use git, use "diff -purN OLD NEW". If your version of
5372 diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of 5367 diff does not support these options, then get the latest version of
5373 GNU diff. 5368 GNU diff.
5374 5369
5375 The current directory when running this command shall be the parent 5370 The current directory when running this command shall be the parent
5376 directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that 5371 directory of the U-Boot source tree (i. e. please make sure that
5377 your patch includes sufficient directory information for the 5372 your patch includes sufficient directory information for the
5378 affected files). 5373 affected files).
5379 5374
5380 We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged, 5375 We prefer patches as plain text. MIME attachments are discouraged,
5381 and compressed attachments must not be used. 5376 and compressed attachments must not be used.
5382 5377
5383 * If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several 5378 * If one logical set of modifications affects or creates several
5384 files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file. 5379 files, all these changes shall be submitted in a SINGLE patch file.
5385 5380
5386 * Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be 5381 * Changesets that contain different, unrelated modifications shall be
5387 submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset. 5382 submitted as SEPARATE patches, one patch per changeset.
5388 5383
5389 5384
5390 Notes: 5385 Notes:
5391 5386
5392 * Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched 5387 * Before sending the patch, run the buildman script on your patched
5393 source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported 5388 source tree and make sure that no errors or warnings are reported
5394 for any of the boards. 5389 for any of the boards.
5395 5390
5396 * Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch 5391 * Keep your modifications to the necessary minimum: A patch
5397 containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be 5392 containing several unrelated changes or arbitrary reformats will be
5398 returned with a request to re-formatting / split it. 5393 returned with a request to re-formatting / split it.
5399 5394
5400 * If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not 5395 * If you modify existing code, make sure that your new code does not
5401 add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful! 5396 add to the memory footprint of the code ;-) Small is beautiful!
5402 When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only 5397 When adding new features, these should compile conditionally only
5403 (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature 5398 (using #ifdef), and the resulting code with the new feature
5404 disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your 5399 disabled must not need more memory than the old code without your
5405 modification. 5400 modification.
5406 5401
5407 * Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the 5402 * Remember that there is a size limit of 100 kB per message on the
5408 u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are 5403 u-boot mailing list. Bigger patches will be moderated. If they are
5409 reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches 5404 reasonable and not too big, they will be acknowledged. But patches
5410 bigger than the size limit should be avoided. 5405 bigger than the size limit should be avoided.
5411 5406
include/config_cmd_all.h
1 /* File was deleted
2 * Copyright 2007 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc.
3 *
4 * This file is licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public
5 * License Version 2. This file is licensed "as is" without any
6 * warranty of any kind, whether express or implied.
7 */
8
9 #ifndef _CONFIG_CMD_ALL_H
10 #define _CONFIG_CMD_ALL_H
11
12 /*
13 * Alphabetical list of all possible commands.
14 */
15
16 #endif /* _CONFIG_CMD_ALL_H */
17 1 /*